Sie sind auf Seite 1von 437

Cranex Tome

and
Cranex Tome Ceph
Dental X-ray Units

Service Manual

Medical Device Directive


93/42/EEC

April 1999
Document code - 8200629

Manufactured by:
SOREDEX
P.O. Box 250
00031 Helsinki, Finland

Doc. code 8200629 I


Soredex endeavours to produce product documentation that is accurate
and up to date. However, our policy of continual product development
may result in changes to products that are not reflected in the product
documentation. Therefore, this document should not be regarded as an
infallible guide to current product specifications.
Soredex maintains the right to make changes and alterations without
prior notice.

II Cranex Tome Service Manual


General Contents
1. General
Contents ........................................................................................................... 1-i
Introduction ...................................................................................................... 1-1
Associated documentation ............................................................................... 1-1
Warnings and precautions ............................................................................... 1-1
Unauthorized Modifications .............................................................................. 1-4
Disclaimer ........................................................................................................ 1-4

2. Unit Description
Contents ........................................................................................................... 2-i
The Cranex Tome ............................................................................................ 2-1
Mechanical description .................................................................................... 2-6
Operating the unit ............................................................................................ 2-8
Electrical description ........................................................................................ 2-9
How the unit works ........................................................................................ 2-25
Symbols, markings that appear on the unit .................................................... 2-29

3. Covers and cover removal


Contents ........................................................................................................... 3-i
The unit covers ................................................................................................ 3-1
Removing the covers ....................................................................................... 3-4

4. Circuit boards
Contents ........................................................................................................... 4-i
N100 Connector Unit 1 (CU1) ....................................................................... 4-1-1
N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply (AVS) ............................................................ 4-2-1
N300 Z-Motor Controller (ZMC) ................................................................... 4-3-1
N600 Imaging controller (IMC) ..................................................................... 4-4-1
N650 RAM Memory Module (RMM) ............................................................. 4-5-1
N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules (FMMA/FMMAB) ................................. 4-6-1
N700 Motor Controller (MC) ......................................................................... 4-7-1
N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI) ................................................... 4-8-1
N900 Connector Unit (CU2) .......................................................................... 4-9-1
X-Ray Generator ........................................................................................ 4-10-1
N1000 High Voltage Supply (HVS) .............................................................. 4-11-1
N1100 High Voltage Controller (HVC) ......................................................... 4-12-1
N1200 Cassette Head Controller (CHC) ..................................................... 4-13-1
N1400 Tubehead Controller (THC) ............................................................. 4-14-1
N1500 Tubehead (TH) and N1550 Diode Hybride (DH) .............................. 4-15-1
N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface (DKI) ............................................. 4-16-1
N1700 Ceph Interface (CI) ......................................................................... 4-17-1
N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators (CFPI) ............................................. 4-18-1
N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2) ....................... 4-19-1

Doc. code 8200629 III


N2000 Line Interface Unit (LIU) .................................................................. 4-20-1
N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor (TBS) ............................................................... 4-21-1
N2300 Rotation Position Sensor (RPS) ...................................................... 4-22-1
N2400 Cassette Type Sensor (CTS) .......................................................... 4-23-1
N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C (OS) .............................................................. 4-24-1
N2600 Vertical Position Sensors (VPS) ...................................................... 4-25-1

5. Service Codes
Contents ........................................................................................................... 5-i
Introduction ...................................................................................................... 5-1
Code types ...................................................................................................... 5-1
Using Service Codes ....................................................................................... 5-2
List of Service Codes ...................................................................................... 5-9
Factory and installation setups ...................................................................... 5-10
Service Code Descriptions ............................................................................ 5-11
Movement and alignment codes .................................................................... 5-72

6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome


Contents ........................................................................................................... 6-i
Introduction ...................................................................................................... 6-1
PC requirements .............................................................................................. 6-1
Connecting the PC to the Tome ....................................................................... 6-1
Down loading information from the Tome ......................................................... 6-2

7. Trouble Shooting
Contents ........................................................................................................... 7-i
Warnings and precautions ............................................................................... 7-1
Trouble shooting principles .............................................................................. 7-2
Problems during start-up ............................................................................... 7-11
Problems during use ...................................................................................... 7-21
Other problems that may occur during use .................................................... 7-47
Blown fuses ................................................................................................... 7-49
Generator problems ...................................................................................... 7-67

8. Mechanical Parts
Contents ........................................................................................................... 8-i
Replacing the tube head .................................................................................. 8-1

9. Annual Service
Contents ........................................................................................................... 9-i
Annual tests and inspections ............................................................................ 9-1

Appendix A. Technical Specifications

Apendix B Installation and set-up manual

IV Cranex Tome Service Manual


1. General

1. General
Contents
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 1-1
Associated documentation ............................................................................... 1-1
Warnings and precautions ................................................................................ 1-1
General precautions ........................................................................................ 1-1
Radiation Safety .............................................................................................. 1-2
Mechanical safety ............................................................................................ 1-2
Electrical Safety .............................................................................................. 1-2
Electrostatic discharge .................................................................................... 1-3
Explosion Hazard ............................................................................................. 1-3
Unauthorized Modifications .............................................................................. 1-4
Disclaimer ........................................................................................................... 1-4

Doc. code 8200629 1-i


1. General

1 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual


1. General

Introduction
This manual describes how to service the Cranex Tome
and Cranex Tome Ceph. The manual includes servicing
information for all versions of the Cranex Tome and Tome
Ceph, the Gendex ORALIX multiscan and multiscan ceph
and the Satelec X-mind and X-mind ceph.

Associated documentation
The Cranex Tome User's manual.
The Cranex Tome Installation manual.
The Cranex Tome Spare-parts manual.

Servicing warnings and precautions


General precautions
Only Soredex trained and approved service personnel
are allowed to service the Cranex Tome and Tome Ceph.

Before attempting to service the unit make sure that you


know how to operate it. Read the Cranex Tome user's
manual.

Only use original Soredex spare parts when repairing the


unit or replacing parts.

The unit is factory set to operate using a 230VAC power


supply. If the unit is to be used with a 115VAC power
supply jumpers must be attached to the N200 and N1000
boards. Information on how to install theses jumpers is
given in the Cranex Tome installation manual.

Before a new unit can be operated cassette sensitivity


stickers must be attached to all the panoramic cassettes
that will be used with the unit, and the unit calibrated to
work with these cassettes. Refer to the user's manual,
section "Setting up a new unit", for information on how to
do this.

Doc. code 8200629 1-1


1. General

Radiation Safety
Before servicing the unit familiarise yourself with local and
national radiation safety standards and requirements
relating to dental x-ray equipment.

If you need to take test exposures you MUST take ad-


equate steps to protect yourself from radiation. Use a
lead apron or by stand behind a suitable radiation shield.
In addition, when taking an exposure stand at least two
metres (six feet) from the unit.

Mechanical safety
Switch the main power supply off before repairing or
replacing mechanical parts.

Be careful when operating the unit not to get body parts or


clothing trapped between moving parts.

The aperture plate in the collimator is made of lead (Pb)


which is a toxic material. Do not touch it with your bare
hands.

DO NOT open the tube head.


There are no serviceable parts, mechanical or electrical,
inside the tube head.

Electrical Safety
Switch the main power supply off before repairing or
replacing parts.

Live electrical terminals are deadly.


Be sure that power switch is OFF and that precautions
have been taken before opening access doors, removing
enclosures and panels, or attaching accessories.

This equipment should be used only in areas that are


provided with a protective earth connection to ensure an
equipotential ground connection.

Before cleaning or disinfecting the unit switch the main


power supply off.

1-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


1. General

Electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy
electronic components.
A static electricity charge builds up in everyone. The build
up is due to movement, humidity, the person's clothing
and the conductivity of the floor. If anyone charged with
static electricity touches a electronic component the static
electricity will discharge through the component and can
damage or destroy it. Note that components damaged by
electrostatic discharge can fail at a later date.

When servicing the unit take proper precautions to avoid


electrostatic build up and discharge (ESD). Follow the
recommendations for the prevention of ESD that are
used in the country in which you are working. If no recom-
mendations are available follow the guide lines below.

Before handling any electrical parts or components make


sure that any static electricity charge that has built up in
you body is discharged.

When handling electrical parts or components use an


elasticated wrist wrap which is connected to a ground
point through a 1 Mohm current limiting cable. For a
ground point use water pipes, radiators or other objects
that are known to be connected to the ground. Also use a
cable to connect the unit to the same ground potential as
the wrist wrap.
If an antistatic mat is used, connect the wrist wrap to the
carpet and the carpet to the ground potential.
Wash the wrist wrap and check that it is good condition
frequently.

Explosion Hazard
Certain disinfectants and cleaning agents may vaporize
to form an explosive vapour. If such chemicals are used
the vapour should be allowed to disperse before switch-
ing the unit on.

Doc. code 8200629 1-3


1. General

Operating warnings and precautions


The Soredex Cranex Tome x-ray unit must only be used to
take dental, TMJ and cephalometric (optional) x-ray
exposures. It must not be used for any other purpose.

The unit or its accessories must not be modified, altered


or remanufactured in any way. Repairing shall be per-
formed by Soredex authorized service only.

WARNING:
The x-ray unit may be dangerous to both patient and
operator unless safe exposure values are used and
correct operating procedures are observed.

When taking exposures operators must protect them-


selves from radiation by using a lead apron or by stand-
ing behind a suitable radiation shield.

When taking exposures operators must stand at least two


metres (six feet) from the patient.

Operators must be able to see and hear the patient dur-


ing an exposure.

Operators must be able to see the exposure warning


lights and hear the exposure warning signal during expo-
sures. If the X-ray unit is located in such a position that the
operator cannot see the exposure warning lights, an
external exposure warning light must be used.

As radiation safety and protection requirements vary from


country to country and state to state it is the responsibility
of the operator to ensure that all local and national radia-
tion safety and protection requirements are met.

Never leave cassettes open in daylight.

Avoid taking exposures of pregnant women.

The use of ACCESSORY equipment not complying with


the equivalent safety requirements of this equipment may
lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system.

1-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


1. General

Consideration relating to the choice shall include:


– use of the accessory in the PATIENT VICINITY

– evidence that the safety certification of the ACCES-


SORY has been performed in accordance to the
appropriate IEC 601-1 or IEC 950 and/or IEC 601-1-
1 harmonized national standard.

– only RS-232C serial interface cable, provided by the


manufacturer shall be used.

Unauthorized Modifications
Unauthorized changes or modifications to any part of the
unit or its equipment can have hazardous consequences.
Changes or modifications must not be made unless
specifically authorized by Soredex.

When properly assembled with a compatible beam-


limiting device, the diagnostic source assembly will fully
meet the United States of America Federal Performance
Standards for Diagnostic X-Ray Systems and Their
Components (C21FR 1020. 30-32) provided no compo-
nents or parts are removed from the unit and no unauthor-
ized adjustments are made to the beam-limiting device or
tube housing assembly.
Never remove or remanufacture any part of the tube
housing assembly or beam-limiting device.
Never adjust any part of the beam-limiting device unless
under the direction of Soredex or their authorized distribu-
tor.

Doc. code 8200629 1-5


1. General

Disclaimer
Soredex shall have no liability for consequential dam-
ages, personal injury, loss, damage or expense directly or
indirectly arising from the use of its products. No agent,
distributor or other party is authorized to make any war-
ranty or other liability on behalf of Soredex with respect to
its products.

1-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

2. Unit Description
Contents
The Cranex Tome .............................................................................................. 2-1
The main parts and assemblies of the Tome Pan ............................................ 2-3
The main parts and assemplies of the Tome Pan/ceph .................................... 2-4
Identifying the unit version ............................................................................... 2-5
Mechanical description ..................................................................................... 2-6
Movement axes and moving assemblies .......................................................... 2-7
Operating the unit ............................................................................................. 2-8
Electrical description ......................................................................................... 2-9
Tome circuit boards ......................................................................................... 2-9
Circuit board location ..................................................................................... 2-10
Power supply ................................................................................................. 2-13
Unit control - Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) ............................................... 2-14
Motors and motor control .............................................................................. 2-16
Position control .............................................................................................. 2-17
Diagram showing board location on the wiring diagrams ............................... 2-18
Wiring diagram - sheet 1 ............................................................................... 2-19
Wiring diagram - sheet 2 ............................................................................... 2-20
Wiring diagram - sheet 3 ............................................................................... 2-21
Wiring diagram - sheet 4 ............................................................................... 2-22
Wiring diagram - sheet 5 ............................................................................... 2-23
Power supply and grounding diagram ............................................................ 2-24
How the unit works .......................................................................................... 2-25
Unit functions during use ................................................................................ 2-26
Main functions during the program selection state ......................................... 2-26
Main functions during the patient positioning state ......................................... 2-27
Main functions during the exposure state ....................................................... 2-28
Symbols, markings that appear on the unit .................................................. 2-29

Doc. code 8200629 2-i


2. Unit Description

2 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

The Cranex Tome


The Soredex Cranex Tome is an extra-oral x-ray unit
designed to take exposures of the dento-maxillofacial
region. It cannot be used to take x-ray exposures of any
other part of the human anatomy.

Two main versions of the Cranex Tome are available:


- Cranex Tome Pan
This version takes panoramic, scanographic and
tomographic images

- Cranex Tome Pan/Ceph


This version takes panoramic, scanographic , tomo-
graphic and cephalographic images.

There are several OEM versions of the units:


- Gendex Oralix multiscan
Equivalent to the Cranex Tome Pan

- Gendex Oralix multiscan ceph


Equivalent to the Cranex Tome Pan/Ceph

- Satelec x-mind Tome


Equivalent to the Cranex Tome Pan

- Satelec x-mind Tome ceph


Equivalent to the Cranex Tome Pan/Ceph

The OEM versions are mechanically and electrically the


same as the Soredex Cranex Tome. The only differences
between the versions are the product name labels and
stickers.

The panoramic version of the unit uses standard flat 15


cm x 30 cm panoramic cassettes.

Doc. code 8200629 2-1


2. Unit Description

Cephalometric units for three different film sizes are


available
- Standard metric
Uses 18 x 24 cm cassette to take symmetric vertical
(SV), asymmetric vertical (AV) and asymmetric hori-
zontal (AH) exposures.
Uses 24 x 30 cm cassette to take asymmetric verti-
cal (AV) exposures.

- Large metric
Uses 24 x 30 cm cassette to take asymmetric vertical
(AV), symmetric vertical (SV) and asymmetric hori-
zontal (AH) exposures.

- Inch
Uses 8 x 10 in cassette to take asymmetric vertical
(AV), symmetric vertical (SV) and asymmetric hori-
zontal (AH) exposures.
Pan/ceph units can be supplied with the ceph arm
mounted on either the left- or right-hand side of the col-
umn.

The ceph arm is also available as a retrofit kit that can be


installed to a pan unit that was not originally fitted with a
ceph arm.

All units are factory set to operate using a 230 VAC


power supply. For countries where the power supply is
115 VAC, a 115 VAC conversion kit is supplied with the
unit to convert it to that voltage.
For information on how to instal the 115 VAC conversion
kit, refer to the installation and setup manual.

2-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

The main parts and assemblies of the Tome Pan

Support arm Sliding assembly Head support

Rotating
assembly

C-arm
Rotating unit
On/off switch

Tube head
C-arm
Cassette head assembly

Control panel
Patient support mechanism

Moving column

Fixed column

Doc. code 8200629 2-3


2. Unit Description

The main parts and assemplies of the Tome Pan/ceph

Ceph head support Ceph arm

Cassette holder

Soft tissue filter knob

2-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Identifying the unit version


The unit type/serial number label is located at the rear of
the unit, on the right-hand side, above the main power
cable. The type number allows the version of the unit to be
identified.

Product identification

Country or language code


00 General (English) 07 Russia
01 UK only 08 Italy
02 German 09 Spain
03 USA 10 Portugal
04 Australia 2X OEM version
05 France 3X OEM version
06 Finland and Sweden

X-ray tube version


0 OPX/105
1 DE 100/15ö
2 D-051
3 XL 90

Indicates unit version


0 No cephalometric unit
1 Left-hand ceph - standard metric cassettes
2 Left-hand ceph - large metric cassettes
3 Left-hand ceph - inch size cassettes
4 Right-hand ceph - standard metric cassettes
5 Right-hand ceph - large metric cassettes
6 Right-hand ceph - inch size cassettes

Reserved for future options

The production version

Doc. code 8200629 2-5


2. Unit Description

Mechanical description
The Cranex Tome comprises a two part column, a sup-
port arm, a sliding assembly and rotating unit. The lower
part of the two-part column, the fixed column, is attached
to the wall and floor. The upper part of the column, the
moving column, is able to slide up and down (Z-axis) over
the fixed column. The support arm is located at the top of
the moving column.
Attached to the underside of the support arm is the sliding
assembly and attached to this is the rotating unit. The
rotating unit comprises the rotating assembly and the C-
arm assembly. The sliding unit is able to slide along the
support arm and allows the rotating unit to move towards
or away from the column (Y-axis). The rotating unit is able
to rotate (R-axis) and slide to the left and right (X-axis).
The C-arm assembly, which comprises the C-arm, the
tube head assembly and the cassette head assembly, is
able to tilt (V-axis). The cassette carriage is also able to
move (C-axis) during exposures.

The x-ray tube is a fixed tungsten anode type with focal


spot of 0.4 - 0.5mm, depending on tube type. The maxi-
mum anode voltage is 85kV and maximum current is
10mA. X-ray beam filtration is 2.7 mm Al minimum. Addi-
tional gadolinium filtration is used for tomography
imaging programs.

The patient's head is held in position with a four-point


holding system. The head support holds the temples and
the forehead and the patient support assembly supports
the chin or lips.

The unit can be supplied with an optional ceph unit that


can be mounted either on the left or right-hand side of the
column. The side must be specified when the unit is
ordered.

The unit is normally attached to a wall, but a stand (pt. no.


9801755) is available if the unit needs to be free stand-
ing.

2-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Movement axes and moving assemblies

Doc. code 8200629 2-7


2. Unit Description

Operating the unit


The on/off switch is located on the left-hand side of the
column above the control panel.
The unit is operated by pressing keys on the control panel
and by carrying out manual operations.

Control panel operations include:


- procedure and program selection
- kV selection
- patient size selection
- exposure time selection (ceph units only)
- focal trough positioning (arrow keys)
- height adjustment (arrow keys)

Manual operations include:


- aperture selection (pan, tomo, ceph)
- chin rest position (up or down)
- cassette shield position (narrow beam or wide beam)
- mirror position (open or closed)
- cassette head position (pan or ceph exposures)
- cephalometric soft tissue filter adjustment

Information on the display tells users what to do and


warns them if they make mistakes. If the user selects a
wrong setting the unit cannot be used until the correct
setting is selected.
For information on how to operate the unit refer to the
user's manual.

2-8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Electrical description
A complete description of all the circuit boards is given in
the section "Circuit boards".

Tome circuit boards


Number Name Quantity
N100 CU1 Connector Unit 1 1
N200 AVS Auxiliary Voltage Supply 1
N300 ZMC Z-motor Controller 1
N400 RBI Remote Box Interface 1 Optional
N600 IMC Imaging Controller 1
N650 RMMRam Memory Module 1 On N600
N660 FMMA Flash Mem Module (Mem A) 1 On N600
N665 FMMAB Flash Mem Module (Mem Ab) 2 On N600
(N665 is the same as N660 but with four flash memory chips)
N700 MC Motor Controller 1
N800 ECI External Connectors Interface 1
N900 CU2 Connector Unit 2 1
N1000-2 HVS High Voltage Supply 1
N1100-1 HVC High Voltage Controller 1
N1200 CHC Cass Head Controller 1
N1400 THC Tubehead Controller 1
N1500 TH Tubehead 1 Inside tubehead
N1550 DH Diode Hybrid 7 Inside tubehead
N1600 DKI Display And Keyboard Interface 1
N2000 LIU Line Interface Unit 1
N2100 TBS Top/Bottom Sensor 2
N2300 RPS Rotation Position Sensor 1
N2400 CTS Cassette Type Sensor 1
N2500 OS Opto Sensor (X/Y/C) 3
N2600 VPS Vertical Position Sensors 1

Ceph unit circuit boards


N1700 CI Ceph Interface 1 Ceph Metric/Inch
N1800 CFPI Ceph Filter Position Indicators 1 Ceph Metric/Inch
N1900 CCS1M Ceph Cass Sensors 1 Metric 1 Ceph Metric
N1901 CCS1I Ceph Cass Sensors 1 Inch 1 Ceph Inch
N2200 CCS2M Ceph Cass Sensors 2 Metric 1 Ceph Metric
N2201 CCS2I Ceph Cass Sensors 2 Inch 1 Ceph Inch

Doc. code 8200629 2-9


2. Unit Description

Circuit board location

2 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Doc. code 8200629 2 - 11


2. Unit Description

2 - 12 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Power supply
Power is supplied to the unit through the N2000 board
(Line interface unit). From N2000 power is routed to the
N200 board (Auxiliary voltage supply) which is a switched
mode power supply. This board generates low-voltage
operating powers, +9V, ±19V and +28V, for all the
boards in the unit. The low-voltage powers are distributed
via N100 (Connector unit 1) and N900 (Connector unit 2).
The N200 board also supplies high voltage, 230V (115V),
directly to the x-ray generator. The x-ray generator com-
prises N1000 (High voltage supply), N1100 (High voltage
controller), N1400 (Tube head controller) and N1500
(Tubehead). Note that the N1500 board is located inside
the tubehead and cannot be accessed.

A detailed power supply and grounding diagram is on


page 2.24.

Simplified power supply diagram

Doc. code 8200629 2 - 13


2. Unit Description

Unit control - Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)


The unit is controlled by a microprocessor on the N600
board (Imaging controller) that continually monitors and
controls the operation of the unit. A serial peripheral
interface communication protocol (SPI - RS485) is used
to monitor most of the unit functions.
The microprocessor:
- monitors optosensors and microswitches
- monitors panel keys
- controls unit movements during exposures
- starts, controls and stops x-ray generation
- guides and controls user actions
- monitors safety.

The necessary unit settings and parameters for all the


imaging programs are stored on the MEM boards (N660/
N665 memory modules) which are located on the N600
board.

2 - 14 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Unit block diagram

Doc. code 8200629 2 - 15


2. Unit Description

Motors and motor control


There are five stepper motors and one DC-motor in the
unit. The stepper motors drive the unit in the X, Y, R, V
and C directions.
During exposure these motors are controlled by N600
through the N700 board (Motor controller).
During program selection and patient positioning the
motors are activated by N1600 (Display and keyboard
interface) and controlled by N600 through N700.
Note that if the C-arm or cassette carriage are moved
during exposure setup they will automatically return to the
PIO position. This automatic return feature can be
switched off. Refer to service code 9700.
The DC-motor is used to adjust the height of the unit, Z
direction, and this motor is activated directly by N1600
and controlled by N300 (Z-motor controller).

2 - 16 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Position control
The positions of the mechanical assemblies are moni-
tored by optosensors and microswitches.
The optosensors only respond to start or stop positions
and do not control unit movements. (N600 controls move-
ment duration and speed). The optosensors ensure that
the mechanical assemblies are in the correct PIO (Patient
in/out) or start position for the required exposure.
The statuses of the optosensors are monitored continually
by N600.

Cassette type and cassette carriage position are moni-


tored, via the N1200 board (Cassette head controller), by
optosensors on the N2400 board (Cassette type sen-
sors) and the N2500 board (Cassette carriage sensors)
respectively.

The position of the primary aperture (the selected slot) is


monitored, via connector units N100 and N900, by sen-
sors mounted on the N1400 board (Tubehead controller).

The C-arm rotation position is monitored by optosensors


on the N2300 board (Rotation sensors) and the angle of
the C-arm by the N2600 board (Vertical sensors). The
upper and lower height limits of the unit are monitored by
optosensors on two N2100 boards (Top/bottom sensors).

The positions of the mirror, the chin rest, the cassette


shields and the cassette carriage (pan or ceph) are all
monitored by microswitches.

In the cephalostat the position and orientation of the


different ceph cassettes are monitored by microswitches
on the cephalometric cassette sensor boards via the
N1700 board (Ceph interface). The board used will de-
pend on whether the ceph unit is mounted on the left or
right and whether the unit is for metric or inch cassettes.
The boards are:
- N1900 - left metric
- N1901 - left inch
- N2200 - right metric
- N2201 - right inch

Doc. code 8200629 2 - 17


2. Unit Description

Diagram showing board location on the wiring


diagrams
The dashed areas indicate the sheets of the wiring dia-
gram on which the boards appear.

2 - 18 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Wiring diagram - sheet 1

Doc. code 8200629 2 - 19


2. Unit Description

Wiring diagram - sheet 2

2 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Wiring diagram - sheet 3

Doc. code 8200629 2 - 21


2. Unit Description

Wiring diagram - sheet 4

2 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Wiring diagram - sheet 5

Doc. code 8200629 2 - 23


2. Unit Description

Power supply and grounding diagram

2 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

How the unit works


The user presses control panel keys to select an imaging
program. The microprocessor (N600) monitors the keys
pressed and "identifies" the selected program from the
program information that is stored in the program mod-
ules (N650 and N660).
The program information includes all the settings that the
unit must be set to for the particular exposure program
selected.
The microprocessor then compares the existing unit
settings with the required program parameter settings for
the exposure program selected. If an existing setting is
not the same as the program parameter setting an infor-
mation message will be sent to the display so the user
knows what setting has to be changed.
For example, if the chin rest is in the upper position and
the program selected requires the chin rest to be in the
lower position, the microprocessor will "detect" that the
chin rest is in the wrong position and send an information
message to the display telling the user to change the
position.

When the exposure button is pressed to take an expo-


sure, the microprocessor activates and then controls the
stepper motors so that the unit moves correctly for the
program selected. All information on stepper motor move-
ment duration, speed and direction is included in the
program parameters.

Doc. code 82006290 2 - 25


2. Unit Description

Unit functions during use


The functions and operations of the boards and SPI vary
according to the state in which the unit is in.

Main functions during the program selection state

2 - 26 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Main functions during the patient positioning state

Doc. code 82006290 2 - 27


2. Unit Description

Main functions during the exposure state

2 - 28 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Symbols, markings that appear on the unit


On (power)
Power on symbol

Off (power)
Power off symbol

Radiographic control
Exposure button symbol

Stand-by or preparatory state for a part of equipment


Exposure button enabled (unlocked) symbol

"Off" only for a part of equipment


Exposure button disabled (locked) symbol

Hand-held switch
This symbol identifies the connector for the exposure
switch.

This symbol identifies the connector for an external expo-


sure warning device.

Attention, consult accompanying documents


The RS232C connector for a PC. See also the section
"Warnings and precautions"

This symbol and the letter R (Return) identify the return


button. Press this button to drive the C-arm to the patient
in/out (PIO) position.

Ionizing radiation
Radiation symbol. Appears on the display during an
exposure when radiation is generated.

Connection point for the neutral conductor on permanently


installed equipment.

Connection point for the live conductor on permanently


installed equipment.

Doc. code 82006290 2 - 29


2. Unit Description

Alternating current

Protective earth (ground)

Earth (ground)

Dangerous voltage

Type B equipment

CE (0537) symbol
MDD 93/42/EEC

UL Classification Symbol

DENTAL X-RAY EQUIPMENT MODEL SRC1


CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS
LABORATORIES INC.
WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRIC
SHOCK, FIRE, MECHANICAL AND
OTHER SPECIFIED HAZARDS ONLY
IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 2601-1 AND
CAN/CSA C22.2 NO 601.1 - M90
5D42

The enter (E) key. Press this key to drive the C-arm to the
patient in/out (PIO) position.

The clear (C) key. Press this key to remove information


from the display

The up and down arrows are on the height adjusting keys


and indicate the direction of travel.

The left and right arrows are on the focal trough position-
ing keys and indicate the direction of travel.

2 - 30 Cranex Tome Service Manual


2. Unit Description

Symbols that appear on the aperture labels

Standard metric version

1 Normal height narrow beam aperture


2 Reduced height narrow beam aperture
3 Low filtration tomograph aperture
4 High filtration tomograph aperture
5 Asymmetric vertical aperture for 18 x 24 cm film.
6 Asymmetric horizontal aperture for 18 x 24 cm film.
7 Symmetric vertical aperture for 18 x 24 cm film.
8 Asymmetric vertical aperture for 24 x 30 cm film.

Large metric version

1 Normal height narrow beam aperture


2 Reduced height narrow beam aperture
3 Low filtration tomograph aperture
4 High filtration tomograph aperture
5 Symmetric vertical aperture for 24 x 30 cm film.
6 Asymmetric vertical aperture for 24 x 30 cm film.
7 Asymmetric horizontal aperture for 24 x 30 cm film.

Doc. code 82006290 2 - 31


2. Unit Description

Inch version

1 Normal height narrow beam aperture


2 Reduced height narrow beam aperture
3 Low filtration tomograph aperture
4 High filtration tomograph aperture
5 Asymmetric vertical aperture for 8 x 10 in film.
6 Symmetric vertical aperture for 8 x 10 in film.
7 Asymmetric horizontal aperture for 8 x 10 in film.

2 - 32 Cranex Tome Service Manual


3. Covers and cover removal Contents

3. Covers and cover removal


Contents
The unit covers .................................................................................................. 3-1

Panoramic Covers ........................................................................................... 3-1


Cephalostat Covers ......................................................................................... 3-3
Removing the covers ........................................................................................ 3-4

Removing the top cover ................................................................................... 3-4


Removing the front cover ................................................................................. 3-4
Removing the front column cover ..................................................................... 3-5
Removing the column covers ........................................................................... 3-6
Removing the outer covers from the C-arm ..................................................... 3-8
Removing the cassette head covers ................................................................ 3-9
Removing the inner covers from the C-arm.................................................... 3-11
Removing the tubehead cover ....................................................................... 3-12
Removing the cephalostat covers .................................................................. 3-13

Doc. code 8200629 3-i


Contents 3. Covers and cover removal

3 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual


3. Covers and cover removal

The unit covers


To repair and replace parts the unit covers must be re-
moved. This section lists the covers and describes how to
remove and replace them.

Panoramic Covers

Top cover
Cover plate

Front cover
Upper cover

Rotating assembly cover C-arm covers

Lower cover

Tube head cover

Control panel cover Cassette head - outer cover

Column cover - rear


Front column cover
Left-hand column cover

Base cover

Doc. code 8200629 3-1


3. Covers and cover removal

Support cover
Cover plate

Rotating assembly cover

Patient support cover

Right-hand column cover


Cassette head - upper cover

Cassette head - inner cover

3-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


3. Covers and cover removal

Cephalostat Covers

Cephalostat cover

Ceph cassette holder cover

Doc. code 8200629 3-3


3. Covers and cover removal

Removing the covers


Removing the top cover

The cover is held in place with


twelve screws, ten on top and
two at the rear.

Removing the front cover

Cover plates
Remove the two cover plates from the
rear of the sliding unit and then remove
the front cover.

Front cover

3-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


3. Covers and cover removal

Removing the front column cover

Patient support cover

Remove the patient support cover. It


is held in position by a long screw in
the underside of the patient posi-
tioning assembly

Screw

Loosen these
screws

Patient support assembly

Remove the two screws from the


underside of the front column cover
and then loosen the two screws that
hold the cover to the patient support
assembly.

Front column cover

Screws

Doc. code 8200629 3-5


3. Covers and cover removal

Removing the column covers


The instructions describe the removal of the left-hand
column cover. The right-hand cover is removed in the
same way except that the side is reversed and there is no
frankfort light.

Slide the orange warning light cover Warning light cover


from the top of the column cover.

Remove the two screws that hold the


frankfort light cover (rear of column
cover) in position and remove the cover.

Column cover

Frankfort light cover


(Left-hand side only)

3-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


3. Covers and cover removal

Front cover
Loosen screw

Front cover screw

Remove the front column cover (see previ-


ous page).

Remove left-hand screw from the front


cover and loosen the right-hand screw.

Remove the screw from the bottom front of


the column cover.

Column cover screw

Inner screw
Rear screws

Remove the three screws from the rear of


the column cover and the single screw from
inside the cover.

Doc. code 8200629 3-7


3. Covers and cover removal

Removing the outer covers from the C-arm


The left and right C-arm covers are identical.

Remove the two screws from


the top of the cover and then
pull the cover out slightly.
Screws

Cover

Holding prong

Lift the cover up to disengage


the holding prongs from support
bar and then remove the cover.

Support bar

3-8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


3. Covers and cover removal

Removing the cassette head covers

To remove the outer cover from the cassette head,


remove the four holding screws, two at the top and
two at the bottom, and then disconnect the ready
button cable (J1210) from the N1200 board.

Outer cover

Ready button cable

Holding screws

Doc. code 8200629 3-9


3. Covers and cover removal

To remove the inner cover from the cassette head,


first remove the upper cover. It is held in place with
two screws. Note that a long allen key will be
required to remove them.

Upper cover

Remove the four screws, two at the top and two at the
bottom, that hold the inner cover in position. Note that
the cassette shield mechanism is attached to the inner
cover. The shield position microswitches must be
removed from the top of the inner cover before the
cover can be removed.

Inner cover

Microswitch

3 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual


3. Covers and cover removal

Removing the inner covers from the C-arm

First remove the support cover and


then the two C-arm cover halves.

Support cover C-arm cover halves

Doc. code 8200629 3 - 11


3. Covers and cover removal

Removing the tubehead cover

If the unit is a pan/ceph pull off the soft tissue filter knob.
Remove the aperture selection knob. It is held in place
with one screw.
Remove the four screws that hold the tubehead cover in
position and remove the cover.

Tubehead cover

Soft tissue filter knob


Aperture selection knob
Pan/ceph unuts only

3 - 12 Cranex Tome Service Manual


3. Covers and cover removal

Removing the cephalostat covers

Cephalostat cover

Ceph cassette holder cover

Doc. code 8200629 3 - 13


3. Covers and cover removal

3 - 14 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards Contents

4. Circuit Boards
Contents
N100 Connector Unit 1 (CU1) ........................................................................... 4-1-1
N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply (AVS) ................................................................ 4-2-1
N300 Z-Motor Controller (ZMC) ........................................................................ 4-3-1
N600 Imaging controller (IMC) .......................................................................... 4-4-1
N650 RAM Memory Module (RMM) ................................................................. 4-5-1
N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules (FMMA/FMMAB) ...................................... 4-6-1
N700 Motor Controller (MC) ............................................................................. 4-7-1
N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI) ........................................................ 4-8-1
N900 Connector Unit (CU2) .............................................................................. 4-9-1
X-Ray Generator ............................................................................................ 4-10-1
N1000 High Voltage Supply (HVS) .................................................................. 4-11-1
N1100 High Voltage Controller (HVC) ............................................................. 4-12-1
N1200 Cassette Head Controller (CHC) ......................................................... 4-13-1
N1400 Tubehead Controller (THC) .................................................................. 4-14-1
N1500 Tubehead (TH) and N1550 Diode Hybride (DH) ................................... 4-15-1
N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface (DKI) ................................................. 4-16-1
N1700 Ceph Interface (CI) ............................................................................. 4-17-1
N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators (CFPI) ................................................. 4-18-1
N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2) ............................ 4-19-1
N2000 Line Interface Unit (LIU) ...................................................................... 4-20-1
N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor (TBS) ................................................................... 4-21-1
N2300 Rotation Position Sensor (RPS) .......................................................... 4-22-1
N2400 Cassette Type Sensor (CTS) .............................................................. 4-23-1
N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C (OS) ................................................................... 4-24-1
N2600 Vertical Position Sensors (VPS) .......................................................... 4-25-1

Doc. code 8200629 4-i


Contents 4. Circuit Boards

4 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N100 Connector Unit 1

N100 Connector Unit 1 (CU1)


Location
In top of support arm.
To access, remove top cover.
Field replaceable parts
None.
Description
The N100 Connector Unit 1 (CU1) board serves as a
connector for boards in the rotating unit, the column and, if
installed, the cephalostat. The stepper motors for X- and
Y-movements of the C-arm and the sensor boards
(N2500) that control these movements are also
comnected to this board. Supply voltages from the Auxil-
iary Voltage Supply (N200) to the other boards pass
through N100.

Data from the X and Y sensors goes via the internal SPI
bus to the Image Controller (N600) in serial format. This
differential bus uses the RS485 protocol in the master/
slave configuration. The slave communicates with the
master (N600) using SLVSEL0-3 address signals, the
asyncronous clock is defined with signals SCLK and
SCLKB, which are also differential RS485 signals. The
signals that transfer data from the master to the slave are
called MOSIA and MOSIB (RS485) and from the slave to
the master MISOA and MISOB (RS485).

The green LEDs on the board indicate the supply


voltages. All the LEDs must be on if the unit is to operate
correctly. The yellow LED indicates that there is SPI
communication between the slave (N100) and the master
(N600).

Doc. code 8200629 4-1-1


N100 Connector Unit 1 4. Circuit Boards

Indicator LEDs
LED Colour Indicates
D1 green +28V1 on
D2 yellow SPI communication active
D3 green -19V1 on
D4 green +19V1 on
D5 green +5V on
D8 green +28V2 on
D9 green +9V1 on
D10 green +9V2 on
D11 green +19V2 on
D12 green -19V2 on

Test Points
Number Value
TP2 +5V
TP3 SLVSEL3
TP4 SLVSEL2
TP5 SLVSEL1
TP6 SLVSEL0
TP7 INT_MISO
TP9 SCLK1
TP10 SLV5*
TP11 MRESET*

Connector J101
Pin Signal Description
1 +28V1 -
4 POWGND -

Connector J102
Pin Signal Description
1 +28V2 -
4 POWGND -

4-1-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N100 Connector Unit 1

Connector J103
Pin Signal Description
1,2 +9V2 -
3-5 GND2 -
6 +9V1 -
7,8 GND1 -
9 +19V2 -
10 +19V1 -
11,12 ANGND2 -
13 -19V2 -
14 -19V1 -
15,16 ANGND1 -
17 (SYNC) Not used
18 PFAIL* Too low or high +28V supply voltage
19 NETV Analog signal which is proportional to mains voltage
20,21 SREF1,2 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement

22,23 (ON1,2) Not used


24 TOP Column at highest position
25 BOTTOM* Column at lowest position
26 EXPLIGHT* Exposure lights on

Connector J104
Pin Signal Description
1 + 9V1 Supply voltage (logic)
2 GND1 Gnd (logic)
3 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
4 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
5 MISOA SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
6 MISOB SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
7 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
8 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
9 -12 SLVSEL0 - 3 SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3) from IMC
13 MRESET* Master Reset
14 +19V1 Analog supply voltages
15 -19V1 -
16 ANGND1 Analog Gnd

Doc. code 8200629 4-1-3


N100 Connector Unit 1 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J105
Pin Signal Description
1 POWGND1 Power supply GND
2 + 28 V1 Power supply voltage
3 POWGND1 Power supply GND
4 + 28 V1 -
5 POWGND1 Power supply GND
6 - Not used
7 EXPC* Exposure command from IMC and exposure button
8 ( SYNC ) Not used

Connector J106
Pin Signal Description
1-4 RSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to rotation stepper motor
5-8 VSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to vertical stepper motor
9 - 12 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper
motor

Connector J107
Pin Signal Description
1, 3, 5, 7 AGND -
2, 4 +19V -
6 -19V -
8, 9, 11,
13, 15, 16 GND -
10, 12, 14 +9V -
17-18 MOSI_A, MOSI_B SPI diff. RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
19-20 MISO_A, MISO_B SPI diff. RS485 signal (Master In/Slave Out)
21-22 SCLK_A, SCLK_B Differential RS - 485 clock signal
23-26 SLVSEL0-3* SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3)
27 MRESET* Master reset
28 PFAIL* Too low or high +28V supply voltage
29 EXPC* Exposure command from IMC button
30 EXPLGHT* Exposure lights on
31 TOP Column at highest position
32 BOTTOM* Column at lowest position
33-34 SREF1, SREF2 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement
35, 36 ON1, ON2 Not used
37 NETV Analog signal which is proportional to mains
voltage
38 HEADSIZE Not used
39 CEPHAUTO Not used
42, 44, 46,
48, 50 POWGND -
43, 45,
47, 49 +28V -

4-1-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N100 Connector Unit 1

Connector J108
Pin Signal Description
1-4 XSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to x-move stepper motor
5-8 YSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to y-move stepper motor
9-12 - Not used

Connector J109
Pin Signal Description
1-4 RSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to rotation stepper motor
5-8 VSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to vertical stepper motor
9-12 CSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to cassette stepper motor

Connector J110
Pin Signal Description
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
3 2XSENS1* X-sensor 1 data
4 GND2 -

Connector J111
Pin Signal Description
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
2 YSENS1* Y-sensor1 data
3 YSENS2* Y-sensor2 data
4 GND2

Connector J112
Pin Signal Description
1-4 XSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to x direction stepper motor

Connector J113
Pin Signal Description
1-4 YSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to y-direction stepper motor

Doc. code 8200629 4-1-5


N100 Connector Unit 1 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J114
Pin Signal Description
1 +9V2 +9V supply voltage to be regulated to +5V
3 +9V2 -
2 GND2 Gnd (+5V)
4 GND2 -
16 GND2 -
5 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
6 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
7 MISOA SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
8 MISOB SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
9 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
10 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
11 MRESET* Master Reset
12-15 SLVSEL0-3 Slave Select 0-3.
17 (CEPHAUTO) Not used
18 SREF2 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement
19 (ON2) Not used
20 (CEPHMAG) Not used

4-1-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N100 Connector Unit 1

Doc. code 8200629 4-1-7


N100 Connector Unit 1 4. Circuit Boards

4-1-8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N100 Connector Unit 1

Doc. code 8200629 4-1-9


N100 Connector Unit 1 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 1 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply

N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply (AVS)


Location
In top of support arm.
To access, remove the top cover.
Field replaceable parts
- Jumpers for voltage conversion.
They MUST be installed if the unit is used with a 115 VAC
mains voltage. Refer to the "Installation and set-up
manual" for information on how to instal the jumper.

- Fuse F1 - 5 AT, 250 VAC


- Fuse F2 - 2 AT, 250 VAC
- Fuse F3 - 1 AT, 250 VAC
- Fuse F4 - 3.2 AT, 250 VAC
- Fuse F5 - 3.2 AT, 250 VAC
- Fuse F6 - 10 AT, 250 VAC
- Fuse F7 - 3.2 AT, 250 VAC @ 230 VAC mains
6.3 AT, 250 VAC @ 115 VAC mains
All fuses are 6.3 mm x 32 mm.
WARNING
Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.

- Cooling fan 24 VDC. Part number 4800955.


Description
The N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply board produces all the
low power supply voltages for the unit. From the mains
voltage it generates +28 VDC, +9VDC and +- 19VDC
low power supply voltages.

The mains voltage (115 or 220-240 VAC) is supplied to a


full bridge rectifier, D58, through RF-filter, RF1. Trans-
former T4 monitors the mains voltage for two reasons, to
generate the supply voltage to start the PWM and to
detect low mains voltage.
If the unit is used with a 115 VAC mains voltage a special
jumpers MUST be installed. A second jumper must also
be connected to N1000.
If the unit is used with a 220-240 VAC mains voltage the
jumpers MUST NOT be used. Refer to the "Installation
and set-up manual" for information on how to instal the
jumpers.

Doc. code 8200629 4-2-1


N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards

Transformer T1 is the mains voltage switching trans-


former with one primary and four secondary windings.
Rectified mains voltage (between DC+ and DC-) is
switched with transistors TR1 and TR2 through T1 to
produce correct output voltages. Transformer T3 switches
the transistors on and off according to the signal
PWMOUT. The current through the transistors is moni-
tored by transformer T2 and its current feedback signal is
used to control the current mode PWM (IC1) circuit.

Indicator LED’s
Led Colour Indicates
D11 green +9V on
D12 green -19V on
D13 green +19V on
D14 green +28V on (before fuses F4-F6)
D24 green +28V1 on
D25 green +28V2 on
D26 green +28V3 on
D45 green PWM is switching
D57 yellow High voltage (350 VDC on)
Test points
Pin Signal Description
TP1 GND 1,2,3 Ground for +9V
TP2 +9V -
TP3 ANGND Gnd for ±19V
TP4 -19V -
TP5 +19V -
TP6 +28V_FB +28V putput of T1 (before fuses F4-F6)
TP7 POWGND Gnd for +28V
TP8 +22V PWM supply voltage
TP9, 20 SIGGND Signal gnd
TP10 COMP PWM error amplifier output
TP11 CT PWM frequency (about 132 kHz)
TP12 CUR_SENS Current feedback signal
TP14 +5V1 +5V supply voltage for AVS
TP16 NETV Signal proportional to mains voltage
TP18 Under or over voltage detection (mains)
TP19 VREF Reference voltage of PWM
TP21 DC+ Rectified mains voltage
TP22 DC0 -
TP23 DC- Rectified mains voltage

4-2-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply

Connector J201
AC1 mains voltage in

Connector J202
AC2 mains voltage in

Connector J203
Pin Signal Description

1,2 - AC1 mains voltage to HVS


5,6 - AC2 mains voltage to HVS

Connector J204
Pin Signal Description

1 +28V1 -
4 POWGND -

Connector J205
Pin Signal Description

1 +28V2 -
4 POWGND -

Connector J206
Pin Signal Description

1, 2 +9V2 -
3-5 GND2 -
6 +9V1 -
7, 8 GND1 -
9 +19V2 -
10 +19V1 -
11, 12 ANGND2 -
13 -19V2 -
14 -19V1 -
15, 16 ANGND1 -
17 (SYNC) Not used
18 PFAIL* Too low or high +28V supply voltage
19 NETV Voltage which is proportional to mains voltage
20, 21 SREF1,2 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement
22, 23 (ON1,2) Not used

Doc. code 8200629 4-2-3


N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J207
Pin Signal Description
1, 2, 3 +28V3 -
6, 7, 8 POWGND -
24 TOP Z-Movement Top Limit
25 BOTTOM* Z-Movement Bottom Limit
26 EXPLGHT* Signal Which Activates Exposure Lights

Connector J208
Pin Signal Description
1, 2 +9 V Logic supply voltage
3, 4 GND Logic gnd
5, 7 +/- 19 V Logic supply voltage
6 ANGND Not used
8 SREF1 Z - motor control in panoramic mode
10 ON1 Not used
9 SREF2 Z - motor control in cephalo mode
SREFN Z-movement direction
<1.7V down
2.5V stopped
>3.5V up
11 ON2 Not used
12 TOP Z-movement top limit
13 BOTTOM* Z-movement bottom limit
14 EXPLGHT* Signal which activates exposure lights.

4-2-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply

Doc. code 8200629 4-2-5


N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 2 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply

Doc. code 8200629 4-2-7


N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 2 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N300 Z-Motor Controller

N300 Z-Motor Controller (ZMC)


Location
In top of support arm.
To access, remove top cover.
Field replaceable parts
None.
Description
The N300 Z-Motor Controller board receives control
signals from the up/down keys on the control panel and
the side of the cephalostat, and the N2100 Top/bottom
sensors. These signals come through the N600, N100
and the N200 boards.
The N300 board has a microprocessor which can inde-
pendently control the speed of z-motor in both directions
and the motor acceleration (0-2 seconds) and
deacceleration (0-1 second) sequences. The N300 board
also switches the exposure lights on.

Reset circuitry
If the microprocessor supply voltage is too low or the
microprocessor stops operating during z-motor move-
ment, a RESET* signal is generated by IC 6. The thresh-
old voltage for the RESET operation is 4.6 V +10 mV with
a 500ns delay.

PWM control signal D/A conversion


The pulsed signal at pin TCMP (compare pin) on proces-
sor IC1 is called SREF_OUT. Its frequency is 357 Hz and
its duty cycle varies between 46.0 - 82.6 %. R3/C8 con-
vert this signal to an analog voltage. This analog voltage
controls the PWM IC4 pulse rate (output PWMOUT*)
which controls the acceleration and deacceleration ramps
of the z-motor.
The internal frequency of the PWM is about 20 kHz.

PAL circuit
The PAL circuit IC 5 protects the processor and prevents
z-motor movement if microprocessor is not functioning
according to the software. It also makes sure that the z-
motor stops if either the TOPLIMIT or BOTLIMIT signal is
generated (the unit has reached its maximum or minimum
height). IC 5 also controls the rotation speed of the z-
motor.

Doc. code 8200629 4-3-1


N300 Z-Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Power drive
The z-motor drive consists of two power drivers IR2110
(IC 7, IC 8) and four power FET transistors IRFZ44 (TR3-
TR6). When channels A and D are active, the z-motor
rotates and drives the unit up. When channels B and C
are active, it rotates and moves the unit down. Thermal
switch SW1 is connected so that it measures the tem-
perature of FETs. If temperature becomes too high, an
OVERTEMP* signal will be generated causing the proc-
essor to decrease the motor speed to 1/4 of the normal
speed. Voltage across R48-R50 is used to monitor the
current through the motor. If motor current exceeds 16 A
the PWM pin COMP will be forced to ground thus disa-
bling the PWM output pulses. The z-motor will then stop.

Indicator LEDs
Led Colour Indicates
D1 green +5 V:n on
D2 yellow Z-MOTOR is on when LED is on. If LED flashes,
1/4 speed only possible (FETs temperature too
high)
D15 green +15 V ON
D16 green +28 V ON

Test pins
Pin Signal

TP1, TP4, TP17, TP18 GND


TP15 POWGND
TP2 +5 V
TP16 +28 V
TP8 SREF_1
TP9 SREF_2
TP10 EXPLIGHT*
TP11 EL1- Exposure light test point
TP12 Low voltage RESET*
TP5 SREF_OUT
TP3 MOT CUR, current limit
TP7 SREF3 = PWM pin COMP
TP6 PWMOUT*
TP13 ZM2, motor connection ( J303 / 4 )
TP14 ZM1, motor connection ( J303 / 1 )

4-3-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N300 Z-Motor Controller

Connector J301
Pin Signal Description
1, 2, 3 +28V3 -
6, 7, 8 POWGND -

Connector J302
Pin Signal Description
1, 2 +9 V Logic supply voltage
3, 4 GND Logic gnd
5, 7 +/- 19 V Not used
6 ANGND Not used
8 SREF1 Z-motor control in panoramic mode
10 ON1 Z-motor enable in panoramic mode
9 SREF2 Z-motor control in cephalo mode
SREF Z-movement direction
<1.7V down
2.5V stopped
>3.5V up
11 ON2 Z-motor enable in cephalo mode.
12 TOP Z-movement top limit
13 BOTTOM* Z-movement bottom limit
14 EXPLGHT* Signal which activates exposure lights.

Processor signals (IC1)


Pin Signal Description
10 CPU_OK Processor is in control
9 DOWN Driving down
8 UP Driving up
7 STOP Drive stopped
6 SHUTDOWN PWM and thus the z-motor is disabled
24 SREF_OUT PWM control and speed up/slow down ramp
generation.

Doc. code 8200629 4-3-3


N300 Z-Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Z-Motor controller (ZMC) N300

4-3-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N300 Z-Motor Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4-3-5


N300 Z-Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4-3-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N300 Z-Motor Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4-3-7


N300 Z-Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4-3-8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N600 Imaging controller

N600 Imaging controller (IMC)


Location
In front of moving column.
To access, remove the front column cover.
Field serviceable parts
Battery CR2032.

NOTE
The battery must be replaced with one of the same type
(UL recognised).
Description
Imaging Controller and Display Driver (IMC) consist of the
main processor (IC1), which controls all the main func-
tions of the unit, the driver for the electro luminescent
display (IC15), a real time clock, an A/D converter, +12V
flash EPROM programming electronics and an I/O con-
troller (IC16).

The I/O controller has several functions, to serve as a


Master RESET controller for the peripheral circuits, to
decode the slave addresses (SPI communication), to
verify that the real time clock remains under processor
control, to control the SPI master communication and to
control all those input/output signals that are not micro-
processor signals.

Doc. code 8200629 4-4-1


N600 Imaging controller 4. Circuit Boards

The Display Driver and I/O Controller have been imple-


mented using programmable LCA circuits which are
programmed in the following way. At start up IC 15 con-
figuration is loaded from flash EPROMs on N660. IC 15
is configuration from IC16 in serial format (daisy chain).

Indicator LEDs
LED Colour Indicates
D4 yellow Flash memory +12V programming voltage on (Not
used)
D5 red Motor control reset
D6 red Master reset
D7 yellow LCA’s configured
D8 green +5V ok

Test points
Pin Signal Description
TP1 EL+9V -
TP2 EL+19V -
TP3, TP16, -
TP17, TP34, -
TP39-43 GND -
TP4 +9V -
TP5 MISO_1 Master In / Slave Out signal
TP8 PROGRAM* LCA programming control at start up
TP9 DONE LCA’s are configured

4-4-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N600 Imaging controller

TP10 R/W* Internal bus read/write control


TP11 WRL* Write low
TP12 WRH* Write high
TP13 RDL* Read low
TP14 RDH* Read high
TP15 RESET* CPU reset
TP18 EXPC* Exposure on control
TP20 DONE* LCA’s are configured
TP21-33 Internal bus signals
TP35 Filtered EXP*
TP36 EXPC_1* Exposure enable from processor
TP37 HALT CPU halted
TP38 CLKOUT CPU clock signal
TP44 +5V -

Connector J601
Pin Signal Description
1, 3, 5, 7 AGND -
2, 4 +19V -
6 -19V -
8, 9, 11,
13, 15, 16 GND -
10, 12, 14 +9V -
17-18 MOSI_A, MOSI_B SPI diff. RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave
In)
19-20 MISO_A, MISO_B SPI diff. RS485 signal (MasterIn /Slave
Out)
21-22 SCLK_A, SCLK_B Differential RS - 485 clock signal
23-26 SLVSEL0-3* SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3)
27 MRESET* Master reset
28 PFAIL* Too low or high +28Vsupply voltage
29 EXPC* Exposure command from IMC button
30 EXPLGHT* Exposure lights on
31 TOP Column at highest position
32 BOTTOM* Column at lowest position
33-34 SREF1, SREF2 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement
35, 36 ON1, ON2 Not used
37 NETV Voltage which is proportional to mains voltage
38 HEADSIZE Not used
39 CEPHAUTO Not used
42, 44,
46, 48, 50 POWGND -
43, 45,
47, 49 +28V -

Doc. code 8200629 4-4-3


N600 Imaging controller 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J602
Pin Signal Description
1, 3, 5 AGND -
2 +19V -
4 -19V -
6, 8, 10, 16, 25 GND -
7,9 +9V -
11 STEP1CLK Stepping clock for x-movement
12 STEP2CLK Stepping clock for y-movement
13 STEP3CLK Stepping clock for rotation movement
14 STEP4CLK Stepping clock for vertical movement
15 STEP5CLK Stepping clock for cassette movement
17-21 MC_DATA0-4 5-bit databus for registers
22-24 MC_ADDR0-2 Register select/address signals
26 MCLATCH Register write signal
27 MOTPOWON Switches main power of stepping motor drivers
on and off
28 MVOK* Signal from N700, main motor power is high
enough, and LCA devices are configured
properly
29 LIGHTSON Patient positioning lights on
30 MCRESET* Master reset for N700
32, 34, 36,
38, 40 POWGND -
33, 35, 37, 39 +28V -

Connector J603
Pin Signal Description

1 VDATA Display data


2,4,6,8, -
9,10,12,13 GND -
3 VCLK Display clock
5 HS Horizontal sync
7 VS Vertical sync
11 BLANK/NC Not used
14,17,18 ANGND -
15,16 EL+19V Electroluminance display power +19V
20 SREF1 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement

4-4-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N600 Imaging controller

Connector J604
Pin Signal Description
1-8 KEYCOL7-1* Keyboard columns
9-13 KEY_ROW4-0 Keyboard rows
14, 17, 18 GND -
15, 16 EL+9V Electroluminance sidplay power +9V
19 SPEAKER Speaker output signal
20 LAYER Y- motor control:
out 3.7V
in 1.3V
stop 2.5V

Connector J605
Pin Signal Description
1 EXP* Exposure button signal
2 RDYL Ready for exposures
3, 6, 14 GND -
4 TXD Transmit data (RS232C)
5 RXD Receive data (RS232C)
7 MRESET* Master reset
8 MOSI Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
9 MISO SPI differential RS485 signal (Master In/SlaveOut)
10 SCLK Differential RS - 485 clock signal
11 SLVSEL7* SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3)
15 +28V -
16 POWGND Gnd for +28V electronics

Connector J606
Pin Signal Description
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage to sensors
2 TOP Column at top sensor
4 GND

Connector J607
Pin Signal Description
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage to sensors
2 BOTTOM* Column at bottom sensor
4 GND

Doc. code 8200629 4-4-5


N600 Imaging controller 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J608
Pin Signal Description
1 CRUP* Chin rest up
2 GND -

Connector J609
Pin Signal Description
1 CRDOWN* Chin rest down
2 GND -

Connector J610
Pin Signal Description
1 MIRLOCK* Patient mirror locked
2 GND -

Connector J611
Pin Signal Description
2 SREF1 Analog signal to control up/down Z-movement
4 GND -

Connector J612
Pin Signal Description
2 LAYER Not used
3 LAYERON Not used
4 GND -

4-4-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N600 Imaging Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4-4-7


N600 Imaging Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4-4-8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N600 Imaging Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4-4-9


N600 Imaging Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 4 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N600 Imaging Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 4 - 11


N600 Imaging Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 4 - 12 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N600 Imaging Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 4 - 13


N600 Imaging Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 4 - 14 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N650 RAM Memory Module

N650 RAM Memory Module (RMM)


Location
Plugged into N600.
To access, remove the front column cover.
Field serviceable parts
None
Description
Although the N650 RAM Memory Module (RMM) is a
separate board it is a functional part of N600. On the
N650 board there are the RAM memories that the micro-
processors require.
It is possible to use two different types/sizes of RAM
circuits. JP1 is factory set according to the RAM type
used.

Doc. code 8200629 4-5-1


N650 RAM Memory Module 4. Circuit Boards

4-5-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N650 RAM Memory Module

Doc. code 8200629 4-5-3


N650 RAM Memory Module 4. Circuit Boards

4-5-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules

N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules (FMMA/FMMAB)


Location
Plugged into N600.
To access, remove the front column cover.
Field serviceable parts
None.
Description
Although the Flash Memory Modules N660 (FMMA) and
N665 (FMMAB) are separate boards, they are a func-
tional part of N600. On the N660 and N665 boards there
are flash type EPROM’s that hold the software for all the
imaging programs.
The EPROM flash memories can be programmed, via the
RS232C serial interface connector on the side of the unit,
with a PC and a special serial cable.
This allows the software to be quickly and easily updated
without changing the whole board.
For information on how to do this refer to the section -
"Using a PC with the Cranex Tome".

The basic circuit board is exactly the same for both the
N660 and N665 board. The only difference between the
two boards is the number of EPROMs installed.
On N660 there are two EPROMs and on N665 there are
four EPROMs.

Doc. code 8200629 4-6-1


N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules 4. Circuit Boards

4-6-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N660 Flash PLCC Memory module

Doc. code 8200629 4-6-3


N660 Flash PLCC Memory module 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 6 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N700 Motor Controller

N700 Motor Controller (MC)


Location
In front of moving column.
To access, remove the front column cover.
Field serviceable parts
None.
Description
The motor controller has two functions. It drives all the
stepper motors and controls two of the four patient posi-
tioning lights. The motor control part of the board drives
five stepper motors (X, Y, R, V and C) according to com-
mands from N600 and stepper clocks. All five motors are
driven in a microstepping mode.

The light driver on the board controls the midsagittal and


frankfort patient positioning lights. The light driver also
includes a backup timer which is used to prevent the
lamps from overheating if N600 malfunctions.

The block stepper motor controller is the heart of the


N700 board. Commands, such as the torque used, rota-
tion direction and stepping resolution are written into
stepper motor controller by N600. These programmed
commands define how the stepper clocks are converted
to motor winding current reference voltages to the stepper
motor controller. The function of the stepper motor control-
ler is to control the fullbridge's motor driver so that the
winding current follows the reference voltage. The refer-
ence voltage is compared to the current feedback signals
from the stepper motor driver. While the fullbridge is
driven in the switching mode, commutation control is also
an important part of the block’s functions.

Doc. code 8200629 4-7-1


N700 Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

The N600 board can switch the main power to the motor
drivers on and off (block “motor power switch”). This
function is included to allow the user some control of
movements during exposure. For example, if something
goes wrong (the N600 malfunctions), the user can stop
unit movements by releasing the exposure button. When
the “Motor powers switch” switches off the main power
supply to motor drivers, all motors stop with zero torque
(the moving assemblies can be easily moved by hand).
The positioning light driver is an N600 controlled power
switch with a backup timer. Lights are turned on during
the rising edge of the control signal and stay on until the
input signal is passivated or the backup timer triggers.
The backup time is about 30 seconds. If the timer
switches lights off the input signal must be turned off and
then on to switch lights on again.

Functional description

4-7-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N700 Motor Controller

Indicator LEDs
Led Colour Indicates
D2 Green +15V power is OK.
D5 Yellow Positioning lights are on.
D10 Green +15V power for D/A-convertters is OK
D12 Green Incoming +28V is OK..
D13 Yellow Main power supply for stepping motor drivers is OK
and the MCOK* signal active.
D15 Green +5V power supply is OK.
D16 Yellow LCA-devices are configured properly.
Testpoints
Pin Signal Description
TP1 +15V Regulated +15VDC
TP2 POWGND2 -
TP3 -19V2 Incoming unregulated -19VDC
TP4 +5V Regulated +5VDC
TP5 MOTPOWON IMC control signal. Motor power on.
TP6 LIGHTSON IMC control signal. Positioning lights on.
TP7 MCRESET* IMC control signal. Master reset. Clears all
internal registers and reconfigures both LCA-
devices.
TP8 GND2 -
TP9 +15V2 Regulated +15VDC. Power supply for
D/A-converter
TP10 ANGND2 -
TP11 GND2 -
TP12 IC13 pin 28 Unused pin
TP13 IC13 pin 29 Unused pin
TP14 IC13 pin 36 Unused pin
TP15 IC13 pin 35 Unused pin
TP16 IC13 pin 56 Unused pin
TP17 IC13 pin 57 Unused pin
TP18 IC12 pin 27 Unused pin
TP19 IC12 pin 28 Unused pin
TP20 IC12 pin 36 Unused pin
TP21 RST Download-cable pin 9
TP22 +28V Incoming +28VDC after filtration.
TP23 IC12 pin 75 Unused pin
TP24 GND2 -
TP25 POWGND2 -
TP26 MOTPOW Main power supply for stepping motor driver (L298)
TP27 POWGND2 -

Doc. code 8200629 4-7-3


N700 Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J701
Pin Signal Description
1 ANGND2 Analog ground
2 +19V2 Unregulated +19VDC power supply
3 ANGND2 -
4 -19V2 Unregulated -19VDC power supply
5 ANGND2 -
6 GND2 Digital ground
7 +9V2 Unregulated +9V power supply
8 GND2 -
9 +9V2 -
10 GND2 -
11 STEP1CLK Stepping clock for X-movement
12 STEP2CLK Stepping clock for Y-movement
13 STEP3CLK Stepping clock for R-movement
14 STEP4CLK Stepping clock for V-movement
15 STEP5CLK Stepping clock for C-movement
16 GND2 -
17-21 MCDATA0-4 5-bit databus for registers.
22-24 MCADDR0-2 Register select signals. Five addresses out of eight
are used
25 GND2 -
26 MCLATCH Register write signal. 5-bit data on MCDATA-bus is
written to register selected by MCADDR-signals
when LCA detects high state of MCLATCH
27 MOTPOWON Switches main power to stepping motor drivers on
and off. In 0 state power is switched off. At the same
time MOTON-bits in registers are cleared. This also
causes the motors to be torqueless. In 1 state
MOTPOWON switches power to drivers and allows
normal operation.
28 MCOK* Feedback signal to IMC (N600). While active, it tells
that main motor power is high enough and that the
LCA devices are configured properly. The signal is
open collector type.
29 LIGHTSON Control signal for patient positioning lights. The
rising edge of LIGHTSON switches positioning
lights on. State 0 turns lights off.
30 MCRESET* The master reset for MC. When active, it causes
LCA-devices to reconfigure themselves and sets
all internal registers in MC into power on state.
31 -

4-7-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N700 Motor Controller

32 POWGND2 Power ground


33 +28V2 +28VDC
34 POWGND2 -
35 +28V2 -
36 POWGND2 -
37 +28V2 -
38 POWGND2 -
39 +28V2 -
40 POWGND2 -
Connector J702
Pin Signal Description
1-4 XSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to x-move stepper motor
5-8 YSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to y-move stepper motor
9-12 - Not used

Connector J703
Pin Signal Description
1-4 RSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to rotation stepper motor
5-8 VSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to vertical stepper motor
9-12 CSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to cassette stepper motor

Connector J704
Pin Signal Description
1 PL2+ X positioning light supply voltage
2 XPL- X Positioning light control

Connector J705
Pin Signal Description
1 PL1+ Z positioning light supply voltage
2 ZPL- Z Positioning light control

Connector J706
Pin Signal Description
1 +28V2 +28V power supply
2 POWGND2 Power ground

Doc. code 8200629 4-7-5


N700 Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J707
Pin Signal Description
1 +5V +5V power supply for download connector
2 GND2 Digital ground
3 -
4 CCLK Configuration clock
5 DONE End of programming
6 MAD0 (DIN) Serial data in
7 RESET* (PROG*) Reprogramming
8 INIT* Initialize
9 RST Reset LCA

Jumpers
There are two jumpers on the N700 board, JP1 and JP2.
Only JP1 is used. Jumper JP2 is not used and is perma-
nently shortcircuited.
Different types of D/A-converters can be used on the
board. Jumper JP1 is used to select their different oper-
ating voltages:
- MAX506 requires +5V
- MAX7226 (or TLC7226) requires +15V.

NOTE
All three converters require the same voltage and it is not
possible to mix different types of converter.
The jumper connections are shown below.

+5V power supply


(MAX7226, TLC7226 +15V Power supply
or PM7226) (MAX506)

NOTE
If the D/A-converters are replaced, check the jumper
position before switching the unit on. If the jumper is in the
wrong position the N700 board may be destroyed.
Never leave the jumper unconnected.

4-7-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N700 Motor Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4-7-7


N700 Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4-7-8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N700 Motor Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4-7-9


N700 Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 7 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N700 Motor Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 7 - 11


N700 Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 7 - 12 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N800 External Connectors Interface

N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI)


Location
On the left-hand side of moving column.
To access, remove left-hand column cover.
Field serviceable parts
None.
Description
The N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI) board
allows external devices to be connected to the unit. The
connectors on the board are:
• 6-pin DIN connector (upper) for external exposure/
ready lights

• 6-pin DIN connector (lower) for the exposure button

• a RS232C serial interface connector for a printer or


computer
In addition to the three connectors there is a key lock that
allows the exposure button to be locked so that expo-
sures cannot be taken.

The RS232C serial interface can be used to send expo-


sure information to a printer or PC and to upgrade the unit
software. For information on how to do this refer to the
section - "Using a PC with the Cranex Tome".
An isolated +5V supply voltage is used for all interface
circuits. The +5V is generated by multivibrator IC3 and
transformer T1 (flyback). From output T1 two supply
voltages, isol +9V and isol +5V, are supplied to the elec-
tronics. Opto isolators IC6-IC9 isolate signals RxD, TxD,
EXP* and RDYL between external connectors and the
internal electronics. Filters L2-L3 minimize EMC interfer-
ence.

The external peripheral device connected to the Cranex


Tome (using a RS232C serial interface cable) can be
either a DTE-type (data terminal equipment) e.g. PC/
Terminal or a DCE-type (data communication equipment)
e.g. Printer/Modem/Mouse. The RS 232 transceiver IC 2
(MAX 202, Dual RS 232 + 5V to + 10V charge-pump
voltage converter) is used in the ECI-board as DTE-type
equipment. The direction of the signals through the RS
232 data-lines ISOL_TXD and ISOL_RXD depend on

Doc. code 8200629 4-8-1


N800 External Connectors Interface 4. Circuit Boards

what kind of external peripheral device (DTE/DCE-type)


is used. The signal directions is selected using jumper
JP1. If the peripheral is a DTE-type then these signals
must be connected crosswise and if the peripheral is
DCE-type the signal lines must be connected to each
other.

The peripheral device can also use hand-shaking signals.


The states and combinations of the hand-shaking signals
depend on what kind of equipment (DTE/DCE-type) the
external peripheral device is. The Cranex Tome has no H/
W hand-shaking signal and and jumper JP 2 is used to to
give the correct hand-shaking signals to the external
peripheral device.

The external peripheral device believes that it is reading


RS 232 communication enabling signals from the device
which is at the other end of the signal lines. In reality it
reads its own signals which it sent momentarily before.
Jumper connections JP1 and JP 2 are shown below. The
Cranex Tome is able to use S/W hand-shaking signals
XON / XOFF. These signals only need three H/W signal
lines.

The connections of the jumpers JP1 and JP2

4-8-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N800 External Connectors Interface

Indicator LEDs
LED Colour Description
D6 green Isolated +5V ok
D7 yellow Receiving data
D8 yellow Transmitting data
D12 green +28V ok
D14 green +15V ok
D18 green +5V ok
D20 yellow Exposure button pressed (EXP* active)

Test points
Pin Signal Description
TP1, 10 PGND -
TP2 ISOL+9V -
TP3 ISOL+5V -
TP4 ISL_TxD -
TP5 ISL_RxD -
TP6 +V -
TP7 -V -
TP8 ISOL_EXP* -
TP9 ISOL_RDY -
TP12 POWGND -
TP13,18 GND -
TP14 TxD -
TP15 +5V -
TP16 EXP* -
TP17 RxD -
TP19 RDYL -

Doc. code 8200629 4-8-3


N800 External Connectors Interface 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J801
Pin Signal Description
1 EXP* Exposure button signal to IMC
2 RDYL Ready for exposures to IMC
3, 6, 14 GND -
4 TXD Transmit data TTL level
5 RXD Receive data TTL level
7 MRESET* Master reset
8 MOSI Nondifferential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
9 MISO SPI nondifferential RS485 signal (Master In/Slave
Out)
10 SCLK Nondifferential RS - 485 clock signal
11 SLVSEL7* SPI slave address 7
15 +28V2 -
16 POWGND2 Gnd for +28V electronics

Connector J802
Pin Signal Description
1 ISOL_EXP1* Exposure button signal after key lock
2 ISOL_EXP1* Exposure button signal before key lock

Connector J803
Pin Signal Description

1 ISOL_EXP2* Exposure button signal (isolated)


2 PGND Isolated gnd

Connector J804
Pin Signal Description

1 ISOL_EXP Active when exposure button pressed


2 PGND -
3 ISOL_RDY Active when unit is ready for exposures

Connector J805
Pin Signal Description

1-9 RS232C Signals

4-8-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N800 External Connectors Interface

Doc. code 8200629 4-8-5


N800 External Connectors Interface 4. Circuit Boards

4-8-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N800 External Connectors Interface

Doc. code 8200629 4-8-7


N800 External Connectors Interface 4. Circuit Boards

4-8-8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N900 Connector Unit

N900 Connector Unit (CU2)


Location
In rotating assembly.
To access, remove the rotating assembly cover from the
cassette carriage side.
Field serviceable parts
None.
Description
The Connector Unit 2 (CU2) board connects boards
N1200, N1000 and N100. In addition to these boards, V-
axis and R-axis stepper motors, and their corresponding
position sensors N2600 and N2300, and focal trough and
TMJ patient positioning lights are connected to this
board.

IC2 converts the statuses of the positioning sensor into


serial form and transmits the signals to microprocessor
IC1.

The N900 board is controlled by the microprocessor IC1.


The microprocessor has an internal EPROM and RAM.
The microprocessor controls the high voltage generator,
monitors the rotation and vertical position detectors,
switches the supply voltage to the optosensors
(SENSPOW), switches the frankfort and TMJ positioning
light on and off and controls the M/S LED. The M/S (Mas-
ter/Slave) LED indicates that the processor is functioning.

The microprocessor controls the high voltage generation


in the following ways.
It sets all the control signals that activate the high voltage
ON and OFF, it sets the correct mA and kV reference
values for the generator and it starts and stops an expo-
sure.

Doc. code 8200629 4-9-1


N900 Connector Unit 4. Circuit Boards

Functional block diagram

4-9-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N900 Connector Unit

Indicator LEDs
LED Colour Indicates
D13 green LED +15 POW on
D14 green LED Master/Slave transmission active
D22 green LED -15V on
D23 green LED +15V on
D24 green LED +5V on

Test pins
Pin Signal Description
TP5 +15 POW -
TP10 POWGND -
TP28 +5 V -
TP18, TP29,
TP42, TP43 GND
TP30 +15 V -
TP31 - 15 V -
TP32 ANGND -
TP2 Y light PL1- -
TP3 Y light PL2- -
TP4 Y light PL+ -
TP11 RESET* CU2 Reset
TP12 SLVSEL10* Slave selection 10
TP23 FILTPOS1 Position of soft tissue filter
TP24 MAFB1 RC filtered mAfb (See feedback values on next
page)
TP25 KVFB1 RC filtered kVfb (See feedback values on next
page)
TP19 KVFAIL1 High voltage disabled
TP20 SDO_LOCAL Serial transmission from microprocessor to circuits
TP21 SDI_LOCAL Serial transmission from IC2 to microprocessor
TP22 CLK_LOCAL Clock signal for local transmission
TP15 MISO1 MASTER IN/SLAVE OUT
TP16 MOSI1 MASTER OUT/SLAVE IN
TP17 SCLK1 SPI transmission clock
TP13 EXPC1* Exposure ON command from IMC after RC filtering
TP14 EXPOUT* CU2 processor command to start exposure
TP9 EXPC2* Start exposure command from CU2
TP6 F/MA* Command to switch tube current on
TP7 AVC* Command to switch on filament and generator sup-
ply voltages
TP8 HEAT* Starts heating filament and preheating sequence
TP1 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
TP26 MAREF Reference value which defines tube current
TP27 KVREF Reference value which defines tube high voltage

Doc. code 8200629 4-9-3


N900 Connector Unit 4. Circuit Boards

Tube Current and voltages feedback values on N900


Tube current mAfb on N900 Tube voltage kVfb on N900
(mA) (TP24) (kV) (TP25)

0 1.61 50 2.71
0.5 1.69 51 2.76
1 1.77 52 2.82
1.5 1.85 53 2.87
2 1.93 54 2.92
2.5 2.01 55 2.97
3 2.09 56 3.02
3.5 2.17 57 3.08
4 2.25 58 3.13
4.5 2.34 59 3.18
5 2.42 60 3.23
5.5 2.50 61 3.29
6 2.58 62 3.34
6.5 2.66 63 3.39
7 2.74 64 3.44
7.5 2.61 65 3.48
8 2.90 66 3.55
8.5 2.98 67 3.60
9 3.06 68 3.65
9.5 3.14 69 3.71
10 3.22 70 3.76
10.5 3.30 71 3.81
11 3.38 72 3.86
11.5 3.46 73 3.92
12 3.54 74 3.97
12.5 3.62 75 4.02
13 3.70 76 4.07
13.5 3.78 77 4.12
14 3.86 78 4.18
14.5 3.95 79 4.23
15 4.03 80 4.28
81 4.34
82 4.39
83 4.44
84 4.49
85 4.55
86 4.60

4-9-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N900 Connector Unit

Connector J901
Pin Signal Description
1 +9V1 Supply voltage (logic)
2 GND1 Gnd (logic)
3 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
4 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
5 MISOA SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
6 MISOB SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In /Slave Out)
7 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
8 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
9 - 12 SLVSEL0 - 3 SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3) from IMC
13 MRESET* Master Reset
14 +19V1 Analog supply voltage
15 -19V1 -
16 ANGND1 Analog Gnd

Connector J902
Pin Signal Description
1, 3, 5 POWGND1 Power supply GND
2 + 28 V1 Power supply voltage
4 + 28 V1 -
6 -
7 EXPC* Exposure command from IMC AND
exposure button
8 ( SYNC ) Not used

Connector J903
Pin Signal Description
1-4 RSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to rotation stepper motor
5-8 VSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to vertical stepper motor
9 - 12 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper motor

Doc. code 8200629 4-9-5


N900 Connector Unit 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J904
Pin Signal Description
1 EXPC2* Exposure ON command to HVC, starts high voltage
generator
2 F/MA* Controls filament circuitry (fil. voltage control/mA
control)
3 AVC* Enables supply voltage for filament supply and high
volt age gererator
4 HEAT* Starts heating filament and preheating sequence
5 KVFAIL* High voltage is below the reference value
6 TIMEOUT Time limit for exposure exceeded (31 s - 41 s)
7 GENHOT Power MOSFET temperature in HVS are over
65oC (not used)
8 (SYNC) Not used
9 ANGND1 Analog Gnd
10 KVREF Reference value which defines tube high voltage
11 MAREF Reference value which defines tube current
12 REFGND Gnd for reference voltages (KVREF, MAREF)
13 KVFBM Voltage monitored from tube high voltage
14 MAFBM Voltage monitored from tube current
15 FILTPOS Position of soft tissue filter in the ceph mode
16 ANGND1 -
17 +19 V1 Analog supply voltages
18 -19 V1 -
19 +28 V1 Supply voltages for power units
20 POWGND1 Gnd for power units
21 +28 V1 -
22 POWGND1 -
23 +28 V1 -
24 POWGND1 -
25 +9 V1 Logic supply voltage
26 GND1 Logic gnd
27 (SLVSEL8*) Slave -address selection No:8 (Not used)
28 (FANDIS*) Not used
29 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
30 TUBEHOT When actice tube head temperature over 70 °C
31 SLVSEL9* Slave address selection from THC pcb
32 GND1 -
33 MISOA SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
34 MISOB SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In /Slave Out)

4-9-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N900 Connector Unit

35 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)


36 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
37 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
38 SLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
39 GND1 -
40 MRESET* Master Reset from IMC (initiates all SPI slaves)
Connector J905
Pin Signal Description
1-4 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper motor on
CHC pcb
5 +28 V1 Supply voltage for poewr units
6 POWGND1 Gnd for power units
7 +9 V1 Logic supply voltage
8 GND1 Logic gnd
9 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
10 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
11 MISOA SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
12 MISOB SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
13 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
14 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
15 - 18 SLVSEL0 - 3 Slave selection 0 - 3
19 MRESET* Master Reset
20 +19 V1 Analog supply voltages
21 -19 V1 -
22 ANGND1 Analog gnd
23 FILTPOS Reserved for soft tissue filter position signal
24 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
25 GND1 -
26 -

Doc. code 8200629 4-9-7


N900 Connector Unit 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J906
Pin Signal Description
1 PL + Y-positioning light (focal trough) supply voltage
2 YPL1 - Y-positioning light (focal trough) control
Connector J907
Pin Signal Description
1 PL + Y-positioning light (TMJ) supply voltage
2 YPL2 - Y-positioning light (TMJ) control

Connector J908
Pin Signal Description
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
2-3 VSENS1* - 2* Vertical movement detector signals

VSENS1* VSENS2*

0 0 Tube head up

0 1 PIO =ok, tube head is horizontal

1 1 Tube head is down

1 0 Impossible situation

4 GND1 Logic gnd

4-9-8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N900 Connector Unit

Connector J909
Pin Signal Description
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
2-4 RSENS1* - 3* Rotation movement detector signals

RSENS1* RSENS2* RSENS3*


1 0 1 -910 <R (Rotation) < -890
PIO (Patient in out)= ok
0 0 1 R > -610
1 0 0 R < -910
0 1 1 590 <R < 610
Right-hand ceph
1 1 1 -890 <R < 610
1 0 1 Impossible situation
1 1 0 -610 <R < 590
Left-hand ceph
0 1 0 -590 <R < 590

5 GND1 Logic gnd


6 -8 -
Connector J910
Pin Signal Description

1-4 VSTEP0 - 3 -

Connector J911
Pin Signal Description

1-4 RSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 for rotation movement stepper motor

Doc. code 8200629 4-9-9


N900 Connector Unit 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 9 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N900 Connector Unit

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 9 - 11


N900 Connector Unit 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 9 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N900 Connector Unit

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 9 - 13


N900 Connector Unit 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 9 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards X-Ray Generator

X-Ray Generator
General Description
The High Voltage Supply board (N1000), the High Volt-
age Controller (N1100), the Tube Head Controller N1400
and the Tube Head (N1500 and N1550) together form the
X-ray generator.
The X-ray generator is a high-frequency switching mode
generator with constant potential (DC) output. Both the x-
ray tube voltage and current are monitored using real-
time feedback control.
The X-ray generator regulates the tube voltage and cur-
rent to a preset value selected by the user. The generator
consists of two high frequency switched mode regulators.
In addition to its main functions the generator also in-
cludes safety features against over exposure (TIMEOUT),
X-ray tube arcing (KVFAIL), overheated tube head
(TUBEHOT) and overheated generator (GENHOT).

Detailed Description
The high voltage generator is implemented as an over
resonant frequency modulated switching regulator. It
regulates the power to the tube head by changing the
switching frequency towards or away from the resonant
frequency of the load. Power is increased by lowering the
switching frequency.
The regulator functions as follows. The error amplifier
measures the difference between the kV-reference and
the kV-feedback signals, and the output voltage of the
amplifier (the error voltage) specifies the switching fre-
quency needed to supply the necessary kV-value to the X-
ray tube (to produce the kV-feedback required in the first
place). The kV-reference depends on the kV-value se-
lected by the user.
The desired tube current is regulated with another
switched mode power supply that uses pulse width modu-
lation (PWM). Separate feedback loops control the regu-
lation during the preheat period (FILFB) and the exposure
time (MAFB). The reference voltages necessary for
regulation (KVREF and MAREF) are generated on the
N900 board.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 10 - 1


X-Ray Generator 4. Circuit Boards

Functional block diagram

4 - 10 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1000 High Voltage Supply

N1000 High Voltage Supply (HVS)


Location
In rotating assembly.
To access, remove rotating assembly cover from the
tubehead side. The N1100 board is connected to it.
Field replaceable parts
- Fuse F1 - 16 AFF @ 250 VAC (6.3 x 32 mm).
WARNING
Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.
- Jumper for connector J1008.
If the unit is used with a 115 VAC mains voltage a jumper
MUST be installed on connector J1008. Refer to the
"Installation and set-up manual" for information on how to
instal the jumper.
Description
Most of the power components for X-ray generation are
located on the N1000 board. This board receives the
mains voltage and the low (auxiallary) voltages.

If the unit is used with a 115 VAC mains voltage a special


jumper MUST be plugged into connector J1008. Addi-
tional jumpers must also be connected to the N200
board.
If the unit is used with a 220-240 VAC mains voltage the
jumpers MUST NOT be used. Refer to the "Installation
and set-up manual" for information on how to instal the
jumpers.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 11 - 1


N1000 High Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards

Timing diagram

4 - 11 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1000 High Voltage Supply

Indicator LEDs N1000


Led Colour Indicates
D11 green +28V
D12 green +19V
D13 green +9V
D14 green +28V
D15 green +19V
D16 green GD2 Gate drive 2
D17 yellow GD1 Gate drive 1
D20 yellow GD2 Gate drive 2
D19 yellow GD1 Gate drive 1
D33 yellow High voltage indicator

Test pins N1000


Pin Signal Description
TP1 Full bridge measure point
TP2 Full bridge measure point
TP3 Full bridge measure point
TP4 Full bridge measure point
TP7 DC+ Bulk capacitor voltage
TP8 IO Middle of bulk capacitor measure point
TP9 HVGND High voltage ground
TP10 Full bridge measure point
TP13 Full bridge measure point
TP11 Full bridge measure point
TP12 Full bridge measure point
TP7 DC+ Bulk capacitor voltage
TP8 IO Middle of bulk capacitor measure point
TP9 HVGND High voltage ground
TP4 GD2 Gate drive 2
TP3 GD1 Gate drive 1
TP1 +28V -
TP5 +19V -

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 11 - 3


N1000 High Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J1001
Pin Signal Description
1 FANDIS* Option
2, 3, 4 - Spare
5 AVC1* Filament voltage enable
6 GENHOT Temperature of the power MOSFETs too high
(not used)
7, 8 - Spare
9, 10 GND1 Ground
11, 12 +28V1 Supply voltage for power units
13, 14 POWGND1 GND for power units
15, 16 +19V1 Analog supply voltage
17, 18 +9V1 Logic supply voltage
19, 20 GND1 Ground

Connector J1002
Pin Signal Description
1, 2 PV2 Rectified line voltage
5, 6 PV1 Rectified line voltage

Connector J1003
Pin Signal Description
1, 2 HPA Power output to H.T. transformer
5, 6 HPB Power output to H.T. transformer

Connector J1004
Pin Signal Description
1, 2 +15V Regulated supply for logic and analog circuits
3, 4 +5V Regulated supply for logic circuits
6 TIMEOUTM Measurement for the timeout protection circuit
7 GD1 Gate drive of the power bridge
8 GD2 Gate drive of the power bridge
9 IFB Current feedback
10 ANGND1 Ground for analog circuits

Connector J1005
Pin Signal Description
1 +28V1 Supply voltage for cooling fan
2 FAN2- -

4 - 11 - 4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1000 High Voltage Supply

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 11 - 5


N1000 High Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 11 - 6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1000 High Voltage Supply

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 11 - 7


N1000 High Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 11 - 8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1100 High Voltage Controller

N1100 High Voltage Controller (HVC)


Location
In rotating assembly.
To access, remove rotating assembly cover from the
tubehead side. It is connected to the N1000 board.
Field replaceable parts
None.
Description
High voltage controller includes the necessary pulse
generation and control logic to drive the power stages
located on the N1000 and N1400 boards.
The KV protection circuit
The KV protection circuit compares the KVREF1 (TP16)
and KVFB1 lines with the comparator LM393 (IC9/a). If
the KVFB drops below the KVREF the D-flipflop IC10/a
is triggered by the comparator. When triggered, the
KVFAIL signal (IC10/pin5) goes HIGH, pin 6 goes LOW
and discharges C29 through R30 within 5ms and resets
the flip-flop to the initial state. The LOW state at pin 6
causes the output at pin 4, IC11 (SHUTDOWN), to rise
and short the kV reference voltage (IC13/5), the error
amplifier output, the filament supply feedback loop selec-
tion (F*/MA) and the FET bridge drive (IC10/12) to
ground, thus terminating the exposure temporarily.

The KVFAIL* signal informs the processor (on the N600


board) that an assumed arc in the tube has occured. The
processor counts the KVFAIL* LOW-states and after five
attempts it will give a GENERATOR FAILURE - error
code. If the KVFAIL count does not reach five, the expo-
sure will continue normally with a soft start after shutdown.

A switch on the board allows the kV feedback signal from


the tubehead to the N600 board to be switched off. This
allows the unit to be used without kV feedback error
signals continually interrupting an exposure.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 1


N1100 High Voltage Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Indicator LEDs N1100


Led Colour Indicates
D5 green +15V OK
D6 green +5V OK
D20 yellow EXPC2* Exposure active
D21 yellow AVC* Filament voltage and relays enabled
D1 yellow HEAT1* Filament supply is turned on
D19 yellow F/MA* Tube current is regulated using the
MAFB loop

Test pins N1100


Pin Signal Description
TP1 COMP Compensation signal
TP2 HEAT* Filament supply is turned on
TP3,15 GND -
TP4 TIMEOUT Exposure has lasted more than 31 seconds
TP5 +9V -
TP6 +15V -
TP7 +5V -
TP8 IFB Current feedback from HVS
TP9 VSAWTOOTH V/F-converter voltage ramp
TP10 FILFB Filtered filament voltage feedback
TP11 KVFAIL Tube voltage has dropped below the reference
TP12 - Used for test purposes
TP13 - Dead time pulse
TP14 - Ending the exposure
TP16 KVREF Buffered tube voltage reference
TP17 MAREF Reference for filament regulator
(Filament voltage and tube current)
TP18 VERROR Output of error ampifier
TP19 KVFBM Tube voltage monitor signal
TP20 MAFBM Tube current monitor signal
TP21 EXPC3 Exposure active (last point)

4 - 12 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1100 High Voltage Controller

Connector J1101
Pin Signal Description
1 FANDIS* Option
2, 3, 4 - Spare
5 AVC1* Filament voltage enable
6 GENHOT Temperature of power MOSFETs too high (not used)
7, 8 - Spare
9, 10 GND1 Ground
11, 12 +28V1 Supply voltage for power units
13, 14 POWGND1 GND for power units
15, 16 +19V1 Analog supply voltage
17, 18 +9V1 Logic supply voltage
19, 20 GND1 Ground

Connector J1104
Pin Signal Description
1, 2 +15V Regulated supply for logic and analog circuits
3, 4 +5V Regulated supply for logic circuits
6 TIMEOUTM Measurement for the timeout protection circuit
7 GD1 Gate drive of the power bridge
8 GD2 Gate drive of the power bridge
9 IFB Current feedback
10 ANGND1 Ground for analog circuits

Connector J1102
Pin Signal Description
1 EXPC2* Exposure command
2 F/MA* Filament current is regulated using the
MAFB loop
3 AVC* Filament voltage enable
4 HEAT* Filament supply is turned on
5 KVFAIL* Tube voltage has dropped below the reference
6 TIMEOUT Exposure has lasted more than 20 seconds
7 GENHOT Too high temperature of the power MOSFETs
(not used)
8 SYNC Option

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 3


N1100 High Voltage Controller 4. Circuit Boards

9 ANGND1 Analog GND


10 KVREF Tube voltage reference
11 MAREF Tube current reference
12 REFGND Ground of the MA and KV reference
voltage sources
13 KVFBM Tube voltage monitoring signal
14 MAREF Tube current reference
15 FILTPOS Soft tissue filter position
16 ANGND1 -
17 +19V1 Analog supply voltage
18 -19V1 Analog supply voltage
19 +28V1 Supply voltage for power units
20 POWGND1 GND for power units
21 +28V1 -
22 POWGND1 -
23 +28 V1 -
24 POWGND1 -
25 +9V1 Logic supply voltage
26 GND1 Logic ground
27 SLVSEL8* Option
28 FANDIS* Option
29 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
30 TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70°C)
31 SLVSEL9* Slave address selection
32 GND1 -
33 MISOA SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
34 MISOB SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
35 MOSIA SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
(Master Out/Slave In)
36 MOSIB SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
(Master Out/Slave In)
37 SCLKA SPI clock, differential RS 485 signal
38 SCLKB SPI clock, differential RS 485 signal
39 GND1 -
40 MRESET* Master reset from IMC (initiates all SPI slaves)

4 - 12 - 4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1100 High Voltage Controller

Connector J1103
Pin Signal Description
1 GND1 Logic ground
2 MRESET* Master reset from IMC (initiates all SPI slaves)
3 SCLKA SPI clock, differential RS 485 signal
4 SCLKB SPI clock, differential RS 485 signal
5 MOSIA SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
(Master Out/Slave In)
6 MOSIB SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
(Master Out/Slave In)
7 MISOA SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
8 MISOB SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
9 SLVSEL9* Slave adress selection
10 GND1 -
11 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
12 TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70°C)
13 AVC1* Filament voltage enable
14 FANDIS* Option
15 +9V1 Logic supply voltage
16 GND1 -
17,18 Spare -
19 +28V1 Supply voltage for power units
20 POWGND1 GND for power units
21 +28V1 -
22 POWGND1 -
23 F1GATE Filament control
24 POWGND1 -
25 F2GATE Filament control
26 POWGND1 -
27,28 Spare -
29 +19V1 Analog supply voltage

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 5


N1100 High Voltage Controller 4. Circuit Boards

30 ANGND1 -
31 -19V1 Analog supply voltage
32 ANGND1 -
33 FILTPOS Soft tissue filter position
34 ANGND1 -
35 KVFB Tube voltage feedback
36 ANGND1 -
37 MAFB Tube current feedback
38 ANGND1 -
39 FILFB Filament feedback
40 ANGND1 -

4 - 12 - 6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1100 High Voltage Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 7


N1100 High Voltage Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 12 - 8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1100 High Voltage Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 9


N1100 High Voltage Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 12 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1200 Cassette Head Controller

N1200 Cassette Head Controller (CHC)


Location
In rotating unit cassette head.
To access, remove the outer cover from the cassette
head assembly.
Field serviceable parts
None.
Description
All the cassette head detectors (cassette shield
microswitches, cassette type detectors, cassette car-
riage position detector), the return switch and the cas-
sette carriage stepper motor are connected to N1200
board.
This board also includes optional electronics to convert
analog signals to digital signals for future usage. This is
not shown on the block diagram.
IC18 and IC19 convert all detector and switch data from
parallel to serial format and transmit the data to the N600
board using the differential RS-485 bus via IC10 when the
correct slave address has been selected by IC14.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 1


N1200 Cassette Head Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 13 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1200 Cassette Head Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 3


N1200 Cassette Head Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Indicator LEDs
LED Colour Indicates
D5 green +15 V on
D6 green - 15 V on
D16 green + 5 V on

Test pins
Pin Signal Description
TP1 Not used
TP2 ANGND1 -
TP3 Not used
TP4 Not use
TP5 Not used
TP6 Not used
TP7 ANGND1 -
TP8 Not used
TP9 Not used
TP10 Not used
TP11 Not used
TP12 Not used
TP13 Not used
TP14 Not used
TP15 +15 V -
TP16 - 15 V -
TP17 A / D - reference voltage (4.64 V)
TP18 GND1
TP19 +5V
TP20 GND1
TP21 SLV13*
TP22 SLV11* (slave selection 11)
TP29 SLV12*
TP30 FM_POW_ON (not used)
TP35 GND1

Connector J1201
Pin Signal Description

1 -3 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 of cassette carriage stepper motor


5 + 28 V1 Not used
6 POWGND1 Not used
7 + 9 V1 Logic supply voltage
8 GND1 Logic gnd
9 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
10 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/ Slave In)

4 - 13 - 4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1200 Cassette Head Controller

11 MISOA SPI tranmission differential RS4 signal


(Master In/Slave Out)
12 MISOB SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
13 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
14 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
15 - 18 SLVSEL0 - 3 SPI address (Slave selection 0-3) from IMC
19 MRESET* Master Reset
20 + 19 V1 Analog supply voltage
21 - 19 V1 -
22 ANGND1 Analog gnd
23 FILTPOS Option
24 SENSPOW Supply voltage to sensors
25 GND1 -
26 -

Connector J1202
Pin Signal Description
1 CPOS1* Cass. head position detector,
LOW=normal position
2 GND1 -

Connector J1203
Pin Signal Description
1 CPOS2* Cass. head positon detector. LOW=cephalo posi-
tion
2 GND1 -

Connector J1204
Pin Signal Description
1 SSSENS1* Secondary slit position detection
2 GND1 -

Connector J1205
Pin Signal Description
1 SSSENS2* Secondary tomography aperture position
detection
2 GND1 -

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 5


N1200 Cassette Head Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J1206
Pin Signal Description
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
2 CT0* Cassette type bit 0
3 CT1* Cassette type bit 1
4 GND1 -

Connector J1207 (Optional)

Connector J1208
Pin Signal Description
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
2 CSENS1* Start position of cassette carriage
3 CSENS2* End position of cassette carriage
4 GND1 -

Connector J1209
Pin Signal Description
1-4 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 of cassette carriage stepper motor
5-8 - Not used

Connector J1210
Pin Signal Description
1 RETURN* Return signal from the rotating part
2 GND1 -
3 RTNLGHT Not used
4 GND1 -

Connector J1211 (Optional)

4 - 13 - 6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1200 Cassette Head Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 7


N1200 Cassette Head Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 13 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1200 Cassette Head Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 9


N1200 Cassette Head Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 13 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

N1400 Tubehead Controller (THC)


Location
In the rotating unit in front of the tubehead.
To access, remove the tube head cover.
Field serviceable parts
Fuse F1 - 3.2AT @ 250 VAC (6.3 x 32 mm)
Function
The N1400 board includes the control electronics for the
N1100 (High Voltage Controller) board that generates the
high voltage for the tubehead, filament voltage electronics
and electronics for the primary aperture position detec-
tors. Signals from the tubehead temperature switch and
soft filter position detector pass through the N1400 board.
Feedback Circuitry
Positive and negative high voltages from the tubehead
are divided using high voltage resistors in the tubehead
and resistors R1 and R8 on the N1400 board. These
feedback signals are called kVfb+ and kVfb- respectively.
This differential voltage is converted to a non-differential,
positive signal kVfb which is used by N1100 to control the
high voltage of tubehead.

Tube current is measured using signal mAfb+ which is a


voltage generated by a resistor across the secondary
windings of the high voltage transformer. This voltage is
equal to the tube current. This signal is buffered to signal
mAfb and is used by N1100 to control the tube current.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 1


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

Filament Circuitry
The filament circuitry consists of two parts, circuitry to
enable the supply voltage and circuitry to control the
filament voltage and thus the filament current.
The filament supply voltage, 28VDC, passes through fuse
F1 and transistor switch TR1. Signal AVC1* enables
(switches on) the supply voltage when the signal is L (low
state). The filament transformer in the tubehead has two
identical primary windings. One common end is con-
nected to the supply voltage FILV and the two other ends
are connected to signals F1 and F2. When the filament is
heated the filament controlling circuit on N1100 switches
signals FILGATE1 and FILGATE2 which control switching
transistors TR2 and TR3. When either transistor is on, the
filament transformer is energized through signals F1 and
F2. Both transistors never conduct at the same time.
Primary Aperture Detection
The primary aperture that the user selects is detected
using four opto switches IC4-IC7 reading coded slots in a
positioning rail. The position information is transferred
using MISOA/MISOB-signalling to the microprocessor.
Primary aperture coding is shown in the table below.

Aperture S41 S31 S21 S11


1 1 0 0 0 Normal aperture
2 1 0 0 1 Child aperture
3 1 0 1 1 Tomo 1 aperture
(Nomal filtration)
4 1 1 1 1 Tomo 2 aperture
(Thick filtration)
5 1 1 1 0 Cephalo 1 aperture
6 1 1 0 0 Cephalo 2 aperture
7 0 1 0 1 Cephalo 3 aperture
8 0 1 0 1 Cephalo 4 aperture
Moving 0 0 0 0 None selected

4 - 14 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

Functional block diagram

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 3


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

The timing diagram of the PWM - controller filament Power Supply

4 - 14 - 4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

Indicator LEDs
LED Colour Indicates
D14 green +15V on
D13 green -15V on
D31 green +5V on
D32 yellow SPI active
D24 yellow Filament supply on
D15 yellow Filament transformer is energized

Test pins
Pin Signal Description
TP16 SSENS11* Primary aperture position, opto switch 1
TP17 SSENS21* Primary aperture position, opto switch 2
TP18 SENS31* Primary aperture position, opto switch 3
TP19 SENS41* Primary aperture position, opto switch 4
TP15 FREE1 Not used
TP14 FREE2 Not used
TP20 +5 V -
TP21, TP13, GND -
TP5 +15 V -
TP7 -115 V -
TP2, TP6, TP12- ANGND
TP1 KVFB+ Poitive high voltage feedback
TP3 KVFB- Negative high voltage feedback
TP8 KVFB High voltage feedback
TP4 MAFB mA feedback signal
TP11 - Filament voltage

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 5


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

Connector J1401
Pin Signal Description
1 GND1 Logic ground
2 MRESET* Master Reset from IMC (initiates all SPI slaves)
3 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 signal, SPI clock
4 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 signal, SPI clock
5 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
6 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
7 MISOA SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In /Slave Out)
8 MISOB SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
9 SLVSEL9* Slave address selection
10 GND1 -
11 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
12 TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70 oC)
13 AVC1* Filament voltage enable
14 (FANDIS*) Option
15 +9 V1 Logic supply voltage
16 GND1 -
17, 18 -
19, 21 +28 V1 Supply voltage for power units
20, 22 POWGND1 Gnd for power units
23 F1GATE Filament control, FET:n TR 2 drive
24, 26 POWGND1 -
25 F2GATE Filament control, FET:n TR 3 drive
27, 28 -
29 +19 V1 Analog supply voltage
30, 32 ANGND1 Analog gnd
31 -19 V1 Analog supply voltage
33 FILTPOS Soft tissue filter position
34, 36 ANGND1 -
35 KVFB Feedback signal from tube high voltage
37 MAFB Feedback signal from tube current
38, 40 ANGND1 -
39 FILFB Feedback signal from filament voltage

4 - 14 - 6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

Connector J1402
Pin Signal Description
1 ANGND1 Analog gnd
2 TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70 oC)
3 KVFB+ Feedback voltage from positive high voltage
4 KVFB- Feedback voltage from negative high voltage
5 MAFB+ Feedback signal from tube current
6 FILF Filament voltage
7 F2 -
8 F1 Filament voltage switch mode drive

Connector J1403
Pin Signal Description
1 +5V Supply voltage for the soft tissue filter
potentiometer
2 FILTPOS Soft tissue filter position signal
3 GND1 Logic gnd
4 -

Connector J1404
Pin Signal Description
1 INT28V COOLING FAN 3 positive voltage
2 FAN3- COOLING FAN 3 negative voltage

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 7


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

4 - 14 - 8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 9


N1400 Tubehead Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 14 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 11


N1400 Tubehead Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 14 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1500 Tubehead and N1550 Diode Hybride

N1500 Tubehead (TH) and N1550 Diode Hybride (DH)


Location
Both boards are inside tubehead.
Access not possible.
Field serviceable parts
None. If either or both of these boards malfunction, the
tubehead must be replaced.
Description
The tubehead consists of an x-ray tube and the N1500
board and N1550 board which includes high voltage and
filament transformers, cascade capacitors, high voltage
diodes, and feedback resistors to generate feedback
signals from the high voltage and tube current.

The voltage across R1 and R2 are high voltage feedback


signals. The voltage across R7 is the tube current feed-
back signal. There are no serviceable parts inside the
tubehead and therefore tube head must not be opened in
the field. Note also that tubehead warranty does not cover
tubeheads that have been opened in the field.

Signal Description
F1 Filament voltage switch mode drive
F2 Filament voltage switch mode drive
FILF Filament voltage
KVFB+ Feedback voltage from positive high voltage
KVFB- Feedback voltage from negative high voltage
GND1 Logic gnd
MAFB Feedback signal from tube current
TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70 oC)
HP1, HP2 High voltage transformer primary input

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 15 - 1


N1500 Tubehead and N1550 Diode Hybride 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 15 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface

N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface (DKI)


Location
In the control panel.
To access, remove the control panel cover.
Field serviceable parts
None.
Description
The N1600 board contains voltage regulators for the
electro-luminesence display and circuits to operate the
buzzer (speaker) and to generate movement signals for
the Z-motor and the Y-motor.

The speaker is activated for the duration of an exposure


and briefly when a key is pressed or an error message
appears on the display.

For the motor movements, voltages SREF1 and LAYER


are generated according to the key pressed (Z-UP1 or Z-
UP2* and LAYER+ or LAYER-). These voltages drive
either the Z-motor, which moves the unit up/down, or the
Y-motor which positions the focal trough by moving the
rotating unit towards or away from the column.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 16 - 1


N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface 4. Circuit Boards

Indicator LEDs
LED Colour Indicates
D1 green +5V on
D5 green EL+15V on
D8 green EL+5V on

Test points
Pin Signal Description
TP1 Buzzer output
TP2 SPEAKER Buzzer input
TP3 GND -
TP4 EL+15V -
TP5 EL+19V -
TP6 EL+5V -
TP7 EL+9V -

Connector J1601
Pin Signal Description
1 VDATA Display data
2, 4, 6, 8,
9, 10, 12, 13 GND
3 VCLK Display clock
5 HS Horizontal sync
7 VS Vertical sync
11 -
14, 17, 18 ANGND -
15, 16 EL+19V -
20 SREF1 Z-movement voltage:
up 3.7V
down 1.3V
stop 2.5V

4 - 16 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface

Connector J1602
Pin Signal Description
1-8 KEYCOL7-1* keyboard columns
9-13 KEY_ROW4-0 keyboard rows
14, 17, 18 GND -
15, 16 EL+9V -
19 SPEAKER speaker output signal
20 LAYER Y- motor control:
out 3.7V
in 1.3V
stop 2.5V

Connector J1603
Pin Signal Description
1,2 EL+15V -
3,4 EL+5V -
5 BLANK/NC Not used
6, 7, 8, 10 -
12, 14, 16 GND -
9 VS Vertical sync
11 HS Horisontal sync
13 VCLK Display clock
15 VDATA Display data

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 16 - 3


N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J1604
Pin Signal Description
6-13 KEYCOL0-7* Keyboard columns
1-5 KEY_ROW0-4 Keyboard rows
14 PGND

Connector J1605
Pin Signal Description
1 GND 2
2 LAYER- Y-motor drive towards column
3 LAYER+ Y-motor drive away from column
4 Z-DOWN1* Z-motor drive down
5 Z-UP1* Z-motor drive up

4 - 16 - 4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 16 - 5


N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 16 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1700 Ceph Interface

N1700 Ceph Interface (CI)


Location
In the ceph head support.
To access, remove the cephalostat cover.
Field serviceable parts
None.
Description
The N1700 board is used to send information on the size
of the cephalometric cassette to the N600 board via the
SPI bus (MISOA, MISOB). The board also controls the
soft tissue filter positioning LEDs on the N1800 board,
using data coming from N600 via the SPI bus, and con-
trols the Z-motor movement using an analog signal.

Eight micro switches connected to CCSENS1*-


CCSENS8* determine the size of the cassette and its
position in the cassette holder. The size and position
information is converted into serial format by IC6 and sent
to the microprocessor on the N600 board.

IC7 converts the serial data from the microprocessor to


parallel outputs that switch on leds which indicate the
position of the soft tissue filter.

There are two Z-motor switches on the side of the


cephalostat, one for driving the unit up and one for driving
it down. The circuitry on N1700 for these switches gener-
ates a reference signal that goes to the microprocessor
N300 and controls the z-motor movement according to
the table below.

Z-Movement TP1 Voltage


up 3.7V
down 1.3V
stop 2.5V

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 17 - 1


N1700 Ceph Interface 4. Circuit Boards

Functional block diagram

4 - 17 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1700 Ceph Interface

Test pins
Pin Signal Description
TP1 SREF2 -
TP2 GND2 -
TP3 SLV2* -
TP4 SLV3* -
TP6 +5V -
Connector J1701
Pin Signal Description
1 +9V2 +9V supply voltage to be regulated to +5V
3 +9V2 -
2 GND2 Gnd (+5V)
4 GND2 -
16 GND2 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave
In)
6 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
7 MISOA SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
8 MISOB SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
9 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
10 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
11 MRESET* Master Reset
12-15 SLVSEL0-3 Slave Select 0-3. SPI-väylän osoitelinjat
17 (CEPHAUTO) Not used
18 SREF2 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement
19 (ON2) Not used
20 (CEPHMAG) Not used

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 17 - 3


N1700 Ceph Interface 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J1702
Pin Signal Description
1 CCSENS2* Ceph Cassette Micro switch 1-8.
2 CCSENS1* -
4 CCSENS7* -
5 CCSENS4* -
6 CCSENS6* -
7 CCSENS8* -
8 CCSENS5* -
9 GND2 Gnd
10 GND2 -
Connector J1703
Pin Signal Description
1 +5V Regulated +5V
2 FLED1* Filter position Led 1-5.
3 FLED2* -
4 FLED3* -
5 FLED4* -
6 FLED5* -
7 FLED6* Not used
8 FLED7* Not used

Connectors J1704/J1705
Pin Signal Description
1 Z_UP2* Analog signal to ZMC (via CU1) to control
z-movement
2 GND2 -
3 Z_DOWN2* -

4 - 17 - 4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1700 Ceph Interface

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 17 - 5


N1700 Ceph Interface 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 17 - PB Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators

N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators (CFPI)


Location
In the ceph head support.
To access remove cephalostat cover.
Field serviceable parts
None.
Description
On the N1800 board there are the LED’s that indicate the
position of the soft tissue filter.

Connector J1801
Pin Signal Description
1 +5V Supply voltage for LED’s
2-6 FLED1-5* Filter position LED 1-5 control
7-8 FLED 7-8* Not used

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 18 - 1


N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 18 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2)

N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2)


Location
In the ceph head cassette holder.
To access, remove ceph cassette holder cover.
Field serviceable parts
None.
Description
Two ceph head cassette sensors boards are used in the
cassette holder to identify the size and position of the
cephalometric cassette when it is inserted into the cas-
sette holder.

Metric units use:


- N1900 Ceph Cassette Sensors 1 Metric (CCS1M) and

- N2200 Ceph Cassette Sensors 2 Metric (CCS2M)


Inch units use:
- N1901 Ceph Cassette Sensors 1 Inch (CCS1I) and

- N2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors 2 Inch (CCS2I)


Each pair of boards include a number of microswitches
that are used to determine the size and position of the
cassette. There are nine microswitches in the metric
sensor boards and six on the inch sensor boards.

IMPORTANT NOTE
The same printed circuit board (N1900) is used for both
the N1900 metric sensor board and the N1901 inch
sensor board. The difference between the two boards is
the number and positions of the microswitches soldered
to the board.

The same also applies to the N2200 and N2201 sensor


boards. The same printed circuit board (N2200) is used
by both sensor boards.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 19 - 1


N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2) 4. Circuit Boards

Connector J1901
Pin Signal Description
2 CCSENS1* Cephalo Cassette SENSOR 1*-8*
1 CCSENS2* -
3 CCSENS3* -
5 CCSENS4* -
8 CCSENS5* -
6 CCSENS6* -
4 CCSENS7* -
7 CCSENS8* -
9 GND2 -
10 GND2 -

Connector J1902
Pin Signal Description
1 CCSENS3* Cassette detection signal from N2200
2 CCSENS4* Cassette detection signal from N2200
3 CCSENS8* Signal used only in N1900/N2200
4 GND2 -

Left-hand Ceph Right-hand Ceph


CCSENS(X)* CCSENS(X)*
Cassette size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cassette size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
18 x 24 AV 0 x 1 1 x 0 1 1 18 x 24 AV 1 1 x 0 x 0 1 x
18 x 24 SV 1 0 0 1 x 0 1 1 18 x 24 SV 1 0 0 1 x 0 1 1
18 x 24 AH 0 x x 1 0 1 1 x 18 x 24 AH 1 x x 0 0 1 1 x

24 x 30 AV 0 x x 1 0 1 1 x 24 x 30 AV 1 x x 0 0 1 1 x
24 x 30 SV 1 x x 1 x x 0 0 24 x 30 SV 1 x x 1 x x 0 0
24 x 30 AH 0 x x x x 0 1 x 24 x 30 AH x x x 0 x 0 1 x

8" x 10 " AV 0 x 1 1 x 0 - - 8" x 10" AV 1 1 x 0 x 0 - -


8" x 10 " SV 1 0 0 1 x 0 - - 8" x 10 " SV 1 0 0 1 x 0 - -
8" x 10 " AH 0 x x 1 0 1 - - 8" x 10 " AH 1 x x 0 0 1 - -

x = Does not matter

4 - 19 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2)

The N1900/N1901 board - wiring diagram

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 19 - 3


N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2) 4. Circuit Boards

The N1900/N1901 board - component layout

4 - 19 - 4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2)

The N2200/N2201 board - wiring diagram

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 19 - 5


N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2) 4. Circuit Boards

The N2200/N2201 board - component layout

4 - 19 - 6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N2000 Line Interface Unit

N2000 Line Interface Unit (LIU)


Location
On the side of moving column.
To access remove the right-hand column cover.
Field serviceable parts
Fuse F1 - 8 AT, 250 VAC at 230 VAC mains
- 16 AT, 250 VAC at 115 VAC mains
Size 6.3mm x 32mm
WARNING
Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.

Description
The N2000 board is a connector board for supplying
mains voltage (220-240 VAC or 115 VAC) to the unit. The
board include a mains fuse and mains over-voltage pro-
tection varistors.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 20 - 1


N2000 Line Interface Unit 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 20 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor

N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor (TBS)


Location
There are two N2100 boards in the unit. Both are at-
tached to the moving column, one near the top and one
near the bottom.

To access the top one the column covers and then the
mirror and cover behind the mirror must be removed.
To access the lower one remove the front cover column.
Field serviceable parts
None
Description
TOP/BOTTOM sensor consists of an optical reflective
detector LED. The signal SENSPOW (when high) acti-
vates the detector LED. The detector LED is activated
when a reflective surface is placed in front of it and its
light is reflected. If there is no reflected light the sensor
does not operate. This signal drives the transistor to
either the on or off state (TOP or BOTTOM).

IMPORTANT NOTE
The lower N2100 board detects the position of the unit
when it reaches its maximum height, and the upper
N2100 board when the unit reaches its minimum height.

If the maximum height to which the unit moves is too high


the lower N2100 board can be moved to a second posi-
tion which reduces the height to which the unit can be
driven. For information on how to do this refer to the
"Installation and set-up manual".

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 21 - 1


N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 21 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N2300 Rotation Position Sensor

N2300 Rotation Position Sensor (RPS)


Location
Inside C-arm.
To access remove the C-arm covers.
Field replaceable parts
None.
Description
The N2300 board comprises three optosensors that are
used to detect the rotational position of the C-arm. The
signals from the three sensors are RSENS1*- RSENS3*.
Each optosensor comprises a transmitter LED, and a
receiver, or base. The sensor signals remain on as long
as the base receives light from the LED. If the light beam
to the base is cut off, for example, the positioning rail the
sensor signal is switched off. The signal SENSPOW
(when high) activates the optosensor LED.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 22 - 1


N2300 Rotation Position Sensor 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 22 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N2400 Cassette Type Sensor

N2400 Cassette Type Sensor (CTS)


Location
In rotating unit cassette head.
To access remove the upper and inner covers from the
cassette head.
Field replaceable parts
None.
Description
The N2400 board consists of four optical reflective photo
transistors that are used to detect the position and type
(the film/screen sensitivity number) of panoramic cassette
used.

Note that before any panoramic cassettes can be used


with the unit identification (type) labels must be attached
to cassettes and the sensitivity of their film/screen combi-
nations determined. For information on how to do this
refer to the user's manual.

Two of the detectors on the N2400 board are used to


detect if a cassette is present or not, the park position,
and the other two are used to detect the cassette type.
Black and white areas on the cassette label either reflect
or do not reflect the light from the photo transistor and
thus activate or not activate the detector. Signal
SENSPOW (when high) activates the park position de-
tectors. When these detectors detect the pre-defined
park code, they switch the cassette type detectors on.
With two signals (two bits) it is possible for the type de-
tectors to detect four different combinations:
- no cassette

- cassette with sensitivity number 1

- cassette with sensitivity number 2

- cassette with sensitivity number 3

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 23 - 1


N2400 Cassette Type Sensor 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 23 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N2400 Cassette Type Sensor

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 23 - 3


N2400 Cassette Type Sensor 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 23 - 4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C

N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C (OS)


Location
X-movement sensor in sliding assembly.
To access, remove front cover.

Y-movement sensor in support arm.


To access, remove top cover

C-movement sensor in rotating unit cassette head.


To access, remove cassette head assembly - upper
cover.
Field replaceable parts
None.
Description
Three N2500 boards are used in the unit. They are used
to detect end positions of movements along the X-axis,
the Y-axis and C-axis (the cassette carriage). Each board
comprises two optical switches which generate sensor
signals XSENS1* and XSENS2* (YSENS, CSENS)
according to the end position activated.

Each optosensor comprises a transmitter LED, and a


receiver, or base. The sensor signals remain on as long
as the base receives light from the LED. If the light beam
to the base is cut off, for example, the positioning rail the
sensor signal is switched off. The signal SENSPOW
(when high) activates the optosensor LED.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 24 - 1


N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 24 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


4. Circuit Boards N2600 Vertical Position Sensors

N2600 Vertical Position Sensors (VPS)


Location
Inside C-arm.
To access, remove C-arm covers.
Field replaceable parts
None.
Description
The N2500 board is used to detect end positions of
movement along the V-axis. The board comprises two
optical switches which generate sensor signals
VSENS1* and VSENS2* according to the end position
activated.
The optosensor comprises a transmitter LED, and a
receiver, or base. The sensor signals remain on as long
as the base receives light from the LED. If the light beam
to the base is cut off, for example, the positioning rail the
sensor signal is switched off. The signal SENSPOW
(when high) activates the optosensor LED.

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 25 - 1


N2600 Vertical Position Sensors 4. Circuit Boards

4 - 25 - 2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes Contents

5. Service Codes
Contents
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 5-1
Code types ......................................................................................................... 5-1
Using Service Codes ......................................................................................... 5-2
Selecting service codes ................................................................................... 5-2
Using the service code menus ......................................................................... 5-4
Exiting the service mode .................................................................................. 5-7
Storing new settings ........................................................................................ 5-7
List of Service Codes ........................................................................................ 5-9
Factory and installation setups ...................................................................... 5-10
Service Code Descriptions ............................................................................. 5-11
Code 9301: Parameters saved into FLASH memory ................................. 5-11
Code 9411: S/W-packages updating with the PC ...................................... 5-11
Code 9420: X-ray tube list ........................................................................ 5-11
Code 9430: Event log ................................................................................ 5-12
Code 9431: Failure log .............................................................................. 5-13
Code 9700: MAIN SETUP entry ................................................................ 5-14
Code 9701: Manual switches not monitored .............................................. 5-35
Code 9703: Exposure without movements ................................................ 5-35
Code 9711: Print menu .............................................................................. 5-36
Code 9712: S/W packages version information ......................................... 5-42
Code 9718: Service code list .................................................................... 5-43
Code 9770: H/W test menu ....................................................................... 5-44
Code 9775: Patient In/Out position not monitored ..................................... 5-58
Code 9778: Clear Exposure Counter and logs .......................................... 5-59
Code 9779: X-ray generator test menu ..................................................... 5-60
Code 9791: Ceph Setup ............................................................................ 5-71
Movement and alignment codes .................................................................... 5-72
Code 9960: X movement test .................................................................... 5-72
Code 9961: Y movement test.................................................................... 5-72
Code 9962: r movement test ..................................................................... 5-72
Code 9963: v movement test .................................................................... 5-72
Code 9964: c movement test .................................................................... 5-72

Doc. code 8200629 5-i


Contents 5. Service Codes

Code 9970: Alignment check program ....................................................... 5-73


Code 9971: Alignment program for rotation............................................... 5-73
Code 9973: Maint Gear ratio test for C movement ................................... 5-73
Code 9974: Maint X-ray beam center test ................................................ 5-73
Code 9975: Multipurpose test exposure (13.5 s) ...................................... 5-73
Code 9976: Mechanical endurance test .................................................... 5-74
Code 9977: Maint Beam alignment test .................................................... 5-74
Code 9978: Exposure timeout test (35 s) .................................................. 5-74

5 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Introduction
Service codes allow you to select different service menus
which are used to check and set unit parameters and to
test the operation of the unit.
All service codes are four digits in length (exposure pro-
gram numbers are 3 digits in length) and start with the
number 9, for example 9700.

Code types
There are three categories of service codes:
- codes with numbers between 9300 and 9499
- codes with numbers between 9700 and 9799
- codes with numbers between 9900 and 9999

Codes with numbers between 9300 and 9499 are used


to display information and for parameter and software
updating.

9301 –- Parameters saved into flash memory


9411 —- S/W-packages updating with the PC
9420 —- X-ray tube list
9430 —- Event log
9431 —- Failure log

Note that the event log, service code 9430, can also be
opened directly without keying in the service number and
password. This is described in the user’s manual.

Codes with numbers between 9700 to 9799 are used


during factory set up and during installation, and are used
to check that the unit functions correctly.

9700 —- SYSTEM SETUP entry


9701 –- Manual switches not monitored
9703 —- Exposure without movements
9711 —- Print menu
9712 —- S/W packages version information
9718 —- Service code list
9770 —- H/W test menu
9775 —- Patient In/Out position not monitored
9778 —- Clear Exposure Counter and logs
9779 —- X-ray generator test menu
9791 —- Ceph Setup

Doc. code 8200629 5-1


5. Service Codes

Codes with numbers between 9900 to 9999 are test


programs and used mostly to check the alignment of the
unit when it is installed.

9960 –- X movement test


9961 –- Y movement test
9962 –- R movement test
9963 –- V movement test
9964 –- C movement test
9972 –- Rotor gear ratio test
9973 –- Cassette gear ratio test
9974 -– X-ray beam centering with jig
9975 –- Multipurpose test exposure
9976 –- Test for mechanical movements
9977 –- Beam alignment test
9978 –- Exposure timeout test

Using Service Codes

Selecting service codes


Service codes can be selected whenever the unit is on.
They can be selected when the unit is in the ready (stand-
by) mode (for information on how to get the unit into the
ready mode, refer to the user's manual) or if the unit is
malfunctioning. For example, if an error message ap-
pears on the display you will be unable to get the unit
ready to take an exposure. However, you will be able to
enter the service mode and select a service code.

To enter the service mode and select a service code do


the following:

1. Press the clear (C) key twice. Four zeros will appear
on the display and replace the program number. In
addition the patient size numbers along the bottom
row of the display will change to normal numbers and
a message will appear on the display in the informa-
tion line asking you to key in the program number you
require.

5-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Key in program number and press E

9700 2. Key in the four-digit service code that you require


using the number keys at the bottom of the display.
The numbers will replace the zeros. If you key in a
wrong digit press the clear (C) key to remove the
incorrect digit.
Press the E (Enter) key to accept the number. A mes-
sage will appear on the display in the information line
asking you to key in your password.

Enter password and press E

3. Key in your four-digit password, it will appear as stars


XXXX in the lower right-hand corner of the display.
If the unit is not ready or not working correctly there
will be no password request. In this case just key in
the four digit password.
Press the E key.
The menu, or other information, for service code you
have selected will appear on the display.

The menu will replace the user screen on the display.


In some cases, however, the user screen will not clear
and a status message will appear in the upper mes-
sage (program description) line.
For example, if you select service code 9775 the
following message will appear:
— Patient In/Out position not monitored

Doc. code 8200629 5-3


5. Service Codes

Using the service code menus


When a service code menu appears on the display it
usually offer a range of options or values a new menu will
appear and you must select an option and then press the
E key to accept the option. For example the menu for
service code 9700, system setup, has seven options.

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [000-001]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070004]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?.

Use the keys at the bottom of the display to select the


option number you require. The option number selected
will appear on the last line of the display next to the ques-
tion mark (# ?). For example, if you wish to set the date
and time of the unit press the 5 key to select option
number 5.

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [000-001]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070004]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?. 5

Option selected

5-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

NOTE
If you key in an option number that is not in the menu, for
example you key in 8 and press the E key when there are
only 7 options, a message telling you that the number is
not acceptable will appear on the display.

Selection not in range. Select again.


Press any menu key

You cannot continue until you select an option that is


within the accepted range. To return to the previous menu
press any key.

After you have selected the option number press the E


key.

A second-level menu will replace the first level menu.


Under the menu heading you will see the current setting,
in this case the date and time, and under this a number of
options that allow you to change this setting.

=== Clock Setup:===============================


> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#0. RETURN to Previous level


#1. Date: Year.Month.Day(YY.MM.DD):
#2. Time: Hour.Min (hh.mm):
#3. Sunday #4. Monday
#5. Tuesday #6. Wednesday
#7. Thursday #8. Friday
#9. Saturday
#?:

To change the setting, key in the appropriate option


number and press the E key. In the menu above, for ex-
ample, if you wish to change the time select option
number 2.

Doc. code 8200629 5-5


5. Service Codes

The option number will appear on the last line of the


display next to the question mark (# ?). The option
number also includes a prompt that will enable you to key
in a new setting, in this case hours (hh) and minutes
(mm).

=== Clock Setup:===============================


> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#0. RETURN to Previous level


#1. Date: Year.Month.Day(YY.MM.DD):
#2. Time: Hour.Min (hh.mm):
#3. Sunday #4. Monday
#5. Tuesday #6. Wednesday
#7. Thursday #8. Friday
#9. Saturday
#?: 2

Option selected
NOTE
In some cases a third level menu may open after you
press the E key and you will have to select another option
before the setting can be changed.

Key in a new option setting, in this case the time, and


press the E key.

The menu will disappear briefly and then reappear with


the newly selected setting at the top of the display under
the heading.

=== Clock Setup:===============================


> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 13:39
Newly selected setting
#0. RETURN to Previous level
#1. Date: Year.Month.Day(YY.MM.DD):
#2. Time: Hour.Min (hh.mm):
#3. Sunday #4. Monday
#5. Tuesday #6. Wednesday
#7. Thursday #8. Friday
#9. Saturday
#?:

5-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Press the E key to accept the new setting and return to


the previous menu.

All options can be opened and the settings changed in


the same way as described above - open option, change
setting, press E to accept new setting, press E a second
time to return the previous menu.

Exiting the service mode


Press the E key, or follow the keying instruction on the
display, until you return to the user display. The number of
times you have to press the key will depend on how many
menus or options the service code has.

CAUTION
After you have changed a setting the new settings MUST
be saved permanently into the unit memory.
If you do not store the new settings in the memory they will
be lost when the unit switched off.

Storing new settings


Whenever unit settings are changed the new settings
MUST be saved permanently into the unit memory.

There are two ways to store new setting:

- the maintenance mode method and


- the service code method

Maintenance mode method


1. Select the maintenance mode by pressing the Maint
mode key that is on the right-hand side of the display.
Note
If the maintenance mode does not appear on the
display, press the menu selection key repeatedly until
it does.

Select program

2. Press the Store sttngs key to select the program that


will store the new unit settings in the unit's memory. A
frame will appear around program name.

Doc. code 8200629 5-7


5. Service Codes

Key in password and press E

3. Key in the password using the keys at the bottom of


XXXX the display and press the E key. You will hear a long
signal tone that indicates that the new parameters
have been stored in the memory.

4. Switch the unit off and then on again and check that
the new parameters have be correctly stored.

Service code method


1. Press the C key twice. A message asking you to key
in the program number you require will appear on the
display

Key in program number and press E

2. Key in service code number 9301 and then press the


9301 E key. A message asking you to key in your password
will appear on the display.

Enter password and press E

3. Key in your four-digit password. The program option


XXXX to store new settings will appear on the right-hand
side of the display. The frame round the option text
indicates that the option has been selected.

4. Press the E key. After a couple of seconds the frame


round the option text will disappear. This indicates
that the new settings have been stored in the unit
memory.

5. Switch the unit off and then on again and check that
the new parameters have be correctly stored.

NOTE
If a setting is not stored in the memory before the unit is
switched off the message:

== MISSING CONFIGURATION ITEMS DETECTED


-- Menu Setting NOT Saved
Press any menu key

Will appear on the display when the unit is switched on


again.

5-8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

List of Service Codes


The service codes are listed in numerical order.

=== Service Codes + Titles ====================


9301 — Parameters saved into FLASH memory
9411 — S/W-packages updating with the PC
9420 — X-ray tube list
9430 — Event log
9431 — Failure log
9700 — SYSTEM SETUP entry
9701 – Manual switches not monitored
9703 — Exposure without movements
9711 — Print menu
9712 — S/W packages version information
9718 — Service code list
9770 — H/W test menu
9775 — Patient In/Out position not monitored
9778 — Clear Exposure Counter and logs
9779 — X-ray generator test menu
9791 — Ceph Setup

The list of service codes above can be displayed on the


unit control panel by selecting service code 9718 - Serv-
ice code list

The following service codes (alignment programs) do not


appear in the service code list.

9960 –- X movement test


9961 –- Y movement test
9962 –- R movement test
9963 –- V movement test
9964 –- C movement test
9972 –- Rotor gear ratio test
9973 –- Cassette gear ratio test
9974 -– X-ray beam centering with jig
9975 –- Multipurpose test exposure
9976 –- Test for mechanical movements
9977 –- Beam alignment test
9978 –- Exposure timeout test

All the service codes are explained in more detail in the


section "Service Code Descriptions"

Doc. code 8200629 5-9


5. Service Codes

Factory and installation setups


The main service code is 9700 - SYSTEM SETUP. The
system setup menu includes all the factory and the instal-
lation setups .

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [000-001]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070004]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?.

In normal situations there is no need to alter the factory


setups in the field. The factory setups only needs to be
changed if the unit is updated with the addition of a ce-
phalometric unit.

The installation setups are for setting the date and time,
the user interface language and for calibrating the cepha-
lometric unit when it is installed.

Service code 9700 is explained in more detail in the


section "Service Code Descriptions"

5 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Service Code Descriptions

Code 9301: Parameters saved into FLASH memory


Saves new unit settings in the unit's memory. New set-
tings MUST be permanently saved in the memory. If they
are not they will be lost when the unit is switched off.
Settings can also be saved in the memory by using the
maintenance mode.
Refer to the section "Storing new settings"

Code 9411: S/W-packages updating with the PC


The unit software can be upgraded either by replacing the
software modules or by down loading the new software
from a computer. This is described in section - "Using a
PC with the Cranex Tome".

Code 9420: X-ray tube list


(Also accessible using the maintenance mode)

This code displays a list of all the tubes that the unit can
be fitted with.
Tubes
Id Manufacture Code kV Ang Foc CR/W C/kJ F/V
0 COMET XL-90-5deg/04 90 5 0.4 200 19.2 100.
1 SIEMENS DE 100/150oe 100 5 0.5 200 19.2 100.
2 TOSHIBA D-051SB 100 5 0.5 265 28.0 4.
3 CHIRANA DOA 100/0,6 100 5 0.5 200 19.8 7.
4 C.E.I. OPX/105 100 5 0.5 250 30.0 8.
5 EUREKA. DV-100 100 5 0.5 277 26.0 6.

Selection:—————

The tube that the unit is using is highlighted.


If the existing tube is changed for a new one from a differ-
ent manufacturer, the new one must be selected from the
list before the unit is used.
Use the arrow keys at the bottom of the display select the
new tube.
Press E-key and then confirm the selection by pressing
the Sel (Selected) key.
Make sure that you store the new setting in the memory.
Refer to the section "Storing new settings".

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 11


5. Service Codes

Code 9430: Event log


The event log displays information for the last hundred
exposures taken. Note that the log includes both success-
ful exposures and unsuccessful exposure attempts.

Events
Date Time ExpCtr Pgm Mod kV mA s PS Cas Y-Lr E
970923 1345 69 001 Man 70 10.0 1 5 1 0.0 *
970923 1343 68 001 Man 70 10.0 2 5 1 0.0 *
... ... ... ... ... .. ... . . . ... .
970805 1245 2 004 Man 70 10.0 15 5 1 0.0
970710 1343 1 001 Man 70 10.0 15 5 1 0.0

Each line is for one exposure event. The information that


appears is described below.

Date = the date the exposure was taken, year, month, day
Time = the time the exposure was taken, hours, minutes
ExpCtr = exposure number
Pgm = program number used
Mod = exposure mode, man = manual
kV = the kV used for the exposure
mA = the mA used for the exposure
s = the duration of the exposure in seconds
PS = the patient size used
Cas = the cassette number, film/screen combination,
used
Y-Lr = the position of the focal trough
E = the exposure success status

An asterisk (*) in the E column indicates that the exposure


was unsuccessful. Information giving the reason for the
exposure failure will appear in the error box at the top of
screen, for example:

“EXPOSURE INTERRUPTED - Press RETURN”

If there is no asterisk the exposure was successful and


the error box will be empty.

The arrow keys at the bottom of the display can be used


to scroll up or down through the event list. The latest
exposure is at the top of the list and the oldest at the
bottom.

5 - 12 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Code 9431: Failure log


The failure log displays information for the last hundred
unsuccessful exposures taken.

Events
Date Time ExpCtr Pgm Mod kV mA s PS Cas Y-Lr
970923 1345 69 001 Man 70 10.0 1 5 1 0.0
970923 1343 68 001 Man 70 10.0 2 5 1 0.0
... ... ... ... ... .. ... . . . ...
970820 1003 2 001 Man 70 10.0 0 5 1 0.0
970814 0956 1 001 Man 70 10.0 4 5 1 0.0

Each line is for one exposure failure. The information that


appears is described below.

Date = the date the exposure was taken, year, month, day
Time = the time the exposure was taken, hours, minutes
ExpCtr = exposure number
Pgm = program number used
Mod = exposure mode, man = manual
kV = the kV used for the exposure
mA = the mA used for the exposure
s = the duration of the exposure in seconds
PS = the patient size used
Cas = the cassette number, film/screen combination,
used
Y-Lr = the position of the focal trough

Information giving the reason for the exposure failure will


appear in the error box at the top of screen, for example:

GENERATOR FAILURE: kV”

The arrow keys at the bottom of the display can be used


to scroll up or down through the failure list. The latest
exposure failure is at the top of the list and the oldest at
the bottom.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 13


5. Service Codes

Code 9700: MAIN SETUP entry


This code allows you to access all the factory and installa-
tion setups. The menu is divided into two sections, one
for factory setups, page 1 and installation setups pages 1
and 2.

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [not-set]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070004]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?.
.
.
.
=== SYSTEM SETUP: on/off setups ===== Page 2 ==
#0. RETURN to PREVIOUS level
#1. Cassette type identification [on->off]
#2. PIO auto return [on->off]
#3. Ceph PIO auto return [on->off]
#?.

In normal circumstances the factory setups must not be


changed.
Installation setups are used when the unit is installed.
They are described in the installation and setup manual.

9700 - option #1 (page 1)

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [not-set]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070004]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?. 1

5 - 14 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

When this option is selected ( number key then E key) a


second-level menu will appear on the display.

== SRC1 Type Number Setup ========================


> — Look Service Manual for setting SRC1 Type Number
— Current type number: [000-001]
— Press only E to RETURN to PREVIOUS level
— Enter Type number (6 digits): e.g. 003-406
?:[———]

This menu allows you to change the factory set type


number of the unit. The current type number, the existing
one appears on the display, is the same as the product
code or the type label.
The coding principle is described in the section 2 "Identi-
fying the unit version". The same information is also
included in the Installation Manual. Refer to either of
these sections for coding information.
The type number only needs to be changed if a pan unit is
to be upgraded to a pan/ceph unit.

To change the number:


1. Key in the new six-digit type number using the keys at
the bottom of the display. The number will appear on
the display next to the question (?) mark.

2. Press the E key to accept the new number.

9700 - option #2 (page 1)

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [not-set]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070004]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?. 2

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 15


5. Service Codes

When this option is selected a second-level menu will


appear on the display.

== Serial Number Setup ==================


> — Current serial number: [00070004]
— Press 0 to RETURN to MAIN level
— Enter serial number (max. 8 digits):
?:0———-

This is used to change the serial number of the unit. The


serial number appears on the unit type label and on the
display when option 2 is selected.
The serial number must agree with the SRC1 type
number. The numbers must always be quoted when or-
dering spare parts and when discussing maintenance
and trouble shooting problems with the manufacturer.

The serial number MUST NOT be changed without per-


mission from the manufacturer.

9700 - option #3 (page 1)

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


...
=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==
#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [not-set]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070004]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?. 3

When selected a second-level menu will appear on the


display.

=== Primary Collimator selection ======


> — Current setup: 1
#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Standard metric
#2. Large metric
#3. Standard inch
#?.

5 - 16 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

This menu allows you to select the correct primary colli-


mator (aperture plate) if a cephalometric unit is added
after the unit has been installed.
You do not need to change the primary aperture if you
have already entered the new SRC1 type code.

The menu displays the number of the primary aperture


currently selected. There are three choices of aperture
plate:

#1. Standard metric:- unit without cephalometric unit or


with cephalometric unit that uses standard metric
cassettes

#2. Large metric:- cephalometric unit that uses large


metric cassettes

#3. Standard inch:- cephalometric unit that uses standard


inch cassettes

To change the primary aperture:


1. Select the new primary aperture number you require
by using the keys at the bottom of the display. The
number will appear on the display next to the question
(?) mark.

2.. Press the E key to accept the new primary aperture


number.

9700 - option #4 (page 1)

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [not-set]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070004]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?. 4

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 17


5. Service Codes

When this option is selected a second-level menu will


appear on the display.

=== Ceph: Installation setup ==================


> #0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities —————————
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?.

This menu offer a range of options that allow you to align


and check the operation of the cephalometric unit when
the unit is installed.
The same menu can also be accessed by using the
service code 9791.

9700 - option #4 (page 1) - second level option #1

=== Ceph: Installation setup ==================


> #0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities —————————
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?. 1

When this option is selected a third-level menu will ap-


pear on the display.

== Ceph Configuration Setup =======================


>> — Current setup: CEPH is missing
#0. RETURN to previous level
#1. Remove CEPH device
#2. Left Hand and [mm] Cassettes
#3. Right Hand and [mm] Cassettes
#4. Left Hand and [in] Cassettes
#5. Right Hand and [in] Cassettes
#?.

5 - 18 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

This menu shows you the existing cephalometric configu-


ration, and offers a range of options that allow you to
select different cephalometric options

NOTE
If the unit is supplied with a cephalometric unit, the correct
configuration will already be selected.

The cephalometric options are:


#1. no cephalostat is installed

#2. a left-hand cephalostat that uses standard or large


metric cassettes

#3. a right-hand cephalostat that uses standard or large


metric cassettes

#4. a left-hand cephalostat that uses inch cassettes

#5. a right-hand cephsalostat that uses inch cassettes

To change the cephalometric configuration:


1. Select the new configuration number you require by
using the keys at the bottom of the display. The
number will appear on the display next to the question
(?) mark.

2. Press the E key to accept the new configuration and


then store the new setting in the memory.

9700 - option #4 (page 1) - second level option #2

=== Ceph: Installation setup ==================


> #0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities —————————
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?. 2

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 19


5. Service Codes

When this option is selected a third-level menu will ap-


pear on the display.

NOTE
The ceph program must be selected and the unit in the
ceph position before the vertical offset can be set.

== Ceph Vertical Offset Setup:================


>> — Current setting: Beam Up, offset: 10 [mm]
#0. RETURN to previous level
#1. Beam down
#2. Beam up
#3. Set Vertical offset correction [mm]
#?.

When a cephalometric exposure is taken the tube head


moves slightly so the radiation beam is vertically centred
on the cassette.
This menu is used during the cephalometric installation
procedure and allows the position of the radiation beam
to be adjusted.
The exiting setting can be seen under the menu heading

The procedure for setting the vertical offset is described


in full in the Cranex Tome Installation Manual in the section
"Aligning the Cephalostat". Below is a short overview of
the procedure.

1. Check the position of the cephalometric beam with


the cephalometric alignment tool and decide whether
the beam must be moved up or down to centre it.

2. Key in either 1 or 2 to select the direction, up or down,


in which the beam must be moved and press E.

3. Key in 3 and then key in the number millimetres that


the beam must be moved to place it in the correct
position, up to 35mm in either direction. Press the E
key. The new offset value will appear on the display.

4. Check the position of the radiation before saving the


setting.

5 - 20 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

9700 - option #4 (page 1) - second level option #3

=== Ceph: Installation setup ==================


> #0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities —————————
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?. 3

When this option is selected a third-level menu will ap-


pear on the display.

NOTE
The ceph program must be selected and the unit in the
ceph position before the soft tissue filter positions can be
set. Refer to installation manual for more information on
calibrating the soft tissue filter.

== Ceph Soft Filter Position Calibration ======


>> — Zero Position A/D-value set : 0x0A/010
— First Position A/D-value set : 0x50/080
— Last Position A/D-value set : 0xB4/180
#0. RETURN to previous level..
#1. Set Zero Position #4. Edit Zero Position
#2. Set First Position #5. Edit First Position
#3. Set Last Position #6. Edit Last Position
#?.

The soft tissue filter allows the soft tissue at the front of
the patient's face to be seen on a cephalometric expo-
sure.
The filter has three positions that must correspond to
three filter position lights that are mounted on the cepha-
lometric headrest.
This menu displays the existing filter positions, the three
lines below the menu name, and allows you to set the filter
positions, options 1, 2, and 3 and to edit them, options 4,
5 and 6.
The zero position is for no filtration, the first position for
minimum filtration, and the last position for maximum
filtration.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 21


5. Service Codes

The procedure for setting the positions of the soft tissue


positions is described in full in the Cranex Tome Installa-
tion Manual in the section "Aligning the Cephalostat".
Below is a short overview of the procedure.

1. Place the cephalometric fluorescent screen in the


cassette holder.

2. Select the cephalometric program for the largest film


size.

3. Protect yourself from radiation. Press the exposure


button so that you can see the position of the radiation
beam on the fluorescent screen. Turn the soft tissue
filter knob, located on the side of the tube head as-
sembly, until the edge of the beam lines up with the
last filter position line, maximum filtration, on the
fluorescent screen.
With a left-hand cephalometric unit the right-hand
edge of the beam must line up with the position line
on the right and with a right-hand unit the left-hand
edge must line up with the line on the left.

4. Enter the soft tissue filter calibration mode, key in 3,


set last position, and press the E key. The filter posi-
tion for the last position will appear at the bottom of
the display.

== Ceph Soft Filter Position Calibration ======


>> — Zero Position A/D-value set : 0x0A/010
— First Position A/D-value set : 0x50/080
— Last Position A/D-value set : 0xB4/180
#0. RETURN to previous level..
#1. Set Zero Position #4. Edit Zero Position
#2. Set First Position #5. Edit First Position
#3. Set Last Position #6. Edit Last Position
#?. 3
— Last Position A/D-value set : 0xA0 0x28 160

Press any menu key


Filter position

5 - 22 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

5. Press any key to accept the filter position.

6. Repeat the above procedure for the other two filter


positions.
Position number 2 lines up with the first position line
and number three with the zero position line.

7. Make a note of the filter positions so that they can be


quickly reset if the memory fails and the settings are
lost.

The edit options, 4, 5 and 6, allow you to manually enter


the filter positions. This can be done if the original set-
tings have been lost and you do not wish to carry out the
complete filter calibration procedure.

To enter a filter position manually:


1. Key in the number of the filter position you wish to
edit, for example 6 - the last position, and press the E
key.
A prompt will appear on the display.

2. Enter the filter position using the numbers at the


bottom of the display.

== Ceph Soft Filter Position Calibration ======


>> — Zero Position A/D-value set : 0x0/000
— First Position A/D-value set : 0x0/000
— Last Position A/D-value set : 0x0/000
#0. RETURN to previous level..
#1. Set Zero Position #4. Edit Zero Position
#2. Set First Position #5. Edit First Position
#3. Set Last Position #6. Edit Last Position
#?. 6
— Last Position A/D-value (0..255): 200

Press any menu key


Filter position keyed in

3. Press any key to accept the filter position.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 23


5. Service Codes

Second level options 4, 5, 6, and 7 are for testing the


cephalometric unit.

9700 - option #4 (page 1) - second level option #4

=== Ceph: Installation setup ==================


> #0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities —————————
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?. 4

When this option is selected a third-level menu will ap-


pear on the display.

== Ceph A/D value measurement ==================


>> — EXIT by pressing any key
— Ceph A/D-values (raw/filtered): 037/009

If the soft tissue filter lights do not come on when the soft
tissue filter knob is rotated, or soft tissue filtering does not
appear on radiographs even if filtration is selected, this
option will help you to identify the source of the problem.

In normal use, soft tissue filtration is increased or de-


creased by rotating the filter positioning knob on the side
of the tube head. If the control signal from the filter mecha-
nism is cut an error message will appear on the display
and the filter position leds on the cephalometric will not
come on.

To check if the soft tissue filter is working select this


option and then turn the filter knob. The numeric values on
the last line of the menu must change when the knob is
turned.

If numeric value on the display does not change it indi-


cates that:
- the potentiometer is not working, or

- the signal between the potentiometer and the N900


board is cut, or

- the A/D-converter on the N900 board is damaged.

5 - 24 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

9700 - option #4 (page 1) - second level option #5

=== Ceph: Installation setup =================


> #0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities ————————-
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?. 5

When this option is selected a third-level menu will ap-


pear on the display.

== Ceph Cassette switches data :


>> — EXIT by pressing any key
— Ceph cassette SW binary data(1=up,0=down):
— Bit order 87654321: 11111111

There are eight micro switches in the cephalometric


cassette holder that identify the size, position and orienta-
tion of a cephalometric cassette when it is placed in the
cassette holder. This option allows the operation of the
micro switches to be checked.

When a cassette is placed in the cassette holder it


presses some of the micro switches down and leaves
others unpressed. The number and positions of the
switches pressed identifies the size of cassette and
orientation being used. The cassette/micro switch con-
figurations are described in section 4, "N1900 - Ceph
cassette sensors".

If there is no cassette in the holder none of the switches


will be pressed down and the eight digits on the last line
of the menu will all be "1". If you press one of the switches
the digit will change from "1" to "0".

If the number does not change it indicates that there is a


failure, for example the switch is broken or the signal from
the switch is cut signal.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 25


5. Service Codes

9700 - option #4 (page 1) - second level option #6

=== Ceph: Installation setup =================


> #0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities ————————-
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?. 6

When this option is selected a third-level menu will ap-


pear on the display.

== Ceph LED tests ===========


>> #0. RETURN to previous level
#1. LED 1
#2. LED 1..2
#3. LED 1..3
#4. LED 1..4
#5. LED 1..5
#6. LEDs OFF
#7. LEDs flashing
#8. ALL ABOVE
#?.

There are five soft tissue filter position leds that indicate
the amount of soft tissue filtering (the position of the filter).
The LEDs light up when the soft tissue filter knob is ro-
tated. This menu allows you to check if the LEDs work
correctly.

To test the LEDs:


1. Key in the number of the LED or LEDs you wish to
test, and press the E key. The LED test will start.
#1 = LED 1 will come on
#2 = LEDs 1 and 2 will come on
#3 = LEDs 1, 2 and 3 will come on
#4 = LEDs 1, 2, 3, and 4 will come on
#5 = LEDs 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 will come on
#6 = All the LEDs will be off
#7 = All the LEDs will start to flash
#8 = The LEDs will light up one by one and than start to
flash

5 - 26 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

If the LEDs do not function correctly it is either because :


- the positions of the soft tissue filter have not been
calibrated (to calibrate the filter refer to the installation
manual)

- the LED board or LEDs are damaged

- there is no signal between the N900 board and the


LEDs

9700 - option #4 (page 1) - second level option #7

=== Ceph: Installation setup =================


> #0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities ————————-
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?.

Option 7 switches off the software task that monitors the


states of the microswitches in cephalometric cassette
holder and the position of the primary aperture plate.

If the cephalometric unit does not work correctly this


option allows you to take test exposures using the cepha-
lometric unit without prompt and error messages appear-
ing on the display. With the monitoring switched off error
messages are overridden.

In normal use monitoring must be on. For this reason the


off setting CANNOT be stored into the permanent
memory.

To change the status:


1. Key in option number 7
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?. 7

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 27


5. Service Codes

2. Press the E key and the status will change.


#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring ON
#?.

IMPORTANT NOTE
The option text indicates what the status will be AFTER it
has been changed.
For example, Ceph cassette/ prim slit monitoring ON
indicates that monitoring is currently switched OFF, and
that after you key in 7 and press the E key monitoring will
be switched ON.

9700 - option #5 (page 1)

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [001-001]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070006]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?. 5

When this option is selected a second-level menu will


appear on the display.

=== Clock Setup:===============================


> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#0. RETURN to Previous level


#1. Date: Year.Month.Day(YY.MM.DD):
#2. Time: Hour.Min (hh.mm):
#3. Sunday #4. Monday
#5. Tuesday #6. Wednesday
#7. Thursday #8. Friday
#9. Saturday
#?:

This option displays the date, day and time that the unit is
set to and allows the date, day and time to be reset.

5 - 28 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

The unit uses a real-time clock which has a battery


backup. In normal use the battery will last ten years. The
battery is located on the N600 board. For information on
how to replace the battery, refer to the section that de-
scribes this board.

A real-time clock is needed so that the correct dates and


times appear in the event and failure lists. If the clock is to
serve its purpose correctly the time MUST be set to the
correct local time when the unit is installed.

The clock does not automatically reset itself for daylight


saving and must, therefore, be manually reset when nec-
essary. Also note that the time may have to be reset if a
unit is moved to a new location in a country where there
are time zones.

To reset the date:


1. Key in option number 1 and press the E key. A
prompt will appear on the last line of the menu asking
you to key in the date.
=== Clock Setup:===============================
> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#0. RETURN to Previous level


#1. Date: Year.Month.Day(YY.MM.DD):
#2. Time: Hour.Min (hh.mm):
#3. Sunday #4. Monday
#5. Tuesday #6. Wednesday
#7. Thursday #8. Friday
#9. Saturday
#?:1 Date (YY.MM.DD):

Prompt

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 29


5. Service Codes

2. Use the keys at the bottom of the display to key in the


new date. The date format is years, months days.
When you key in the year only the last two digits need
to be keyed in. For example, the year 1997 only
requires 97 to be keyed in. The same applies or the
year 2000. Only 00 needs to be keyed in. Make sure
that you key in the a full stop (.) after the year and the
month.

=== Clock Setup:===============================


> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#0. RETURN to Previous level


#1. Date: Year.Month.Day(YY.MM.DD):
#2. Time: Hour.Min (hh.mm):
#3. Sunday #4. Monday
#5. Tuesday #6. Wednesday
#7. Thursday #8. Friday
#9. Saturday
#?: 1 Date (YY.MM.DD): 97.09.22
New date

3. Press the E key after you have entered the date. The
screen will clear briefly and the new date will appear
at the top of the menu.
=== Clock Setup:===============================
> DATE: 1997.09.22 Tu 14:39

To reset the time:


The procedure for resetting the time is similar to the
procedure for resetting the date.
Select option 2, press the E key, key in the new time and
then press the E key again to accept the new time.

To reset the day:


Select the number for the day you require and then press
the E key.

5 - 30 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

9700 - option #6 (page 1)

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [001-001]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070006]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?. 6

When this option is selected a second-level menu will


appear on the display.

== User Interface language selection : 1


> -- 0. Previous menu
-- 1. English
-- 2. Italiano
-- 3. Deutsch
-- 4. Suomi
-- 5. Francais
-- 6. Polski
-- 7. Spanish
-- 8. Dutch
#?.

This option allows you to select the interface language


that the display uses. The language that
Note that this option only affects the user menus and
messages. All service menus and messages will be in
English

Setting user interface language:


Key in the number of the language that is required and
then press the E key. The new language number will
appear at the top of the display.
When you return to the main menu it will be in the lan-
guage selected.
Remember to store the new setting in the memory.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 31


5. Service Codes

9700 - option #7 (page 1)

=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [001-001]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070006]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?. 7

When this option is selected a second-level menu will


appear on the display.

=== SYSTEM SETUP: on/off setups ===== Page 2 ==


> #0.
#1.
RETURN to PREVIOUS level
Cassette type identification [on->off]
#2. PIO auto return [on->off]
#3. Ceph PIO auto return [on->off]
#?.

This option offers a range of settings that can be switched


on or off. At the factory all these setting are on and usually
there is no need to change these settings. They only need
to be changed if there is a problem with the unit that
cannot be fixed in the field, for example, no spare parts
for sensors, and a customer wants to continue to use the
unit.

9700 - option #7 (page 2) - second level option #1

=== SYSTEM SETUP: on/off setups ===== Page 2 ==


> #0.
#1.
RETURN to PREVIOUS level
Cassette type identification [on->off]
#2. PIO auto return [on->off]
#3. Ceph PIO auto return [on->off]
#?.

This allows the panoramic cassette identification sen-


sors to be switched on or off.
In normal use a panoramic cassette must be must be
inserted in to the cassette carriage before an exposure
can be taken.

5 - 32 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

The message "Insert cassette" will appear on the dis-


play asking the user to do this. If one of the cassette
identification sensors is broken the cassette will not be
detected and this message will remain on the display.
The user cannot continue to use the unit when it is in this
state.
When the cassette identification sensors are switched off
the unit does not recognise the different cassette sensitiv-
ity numbers (film/screen combinations), and will use the
sensitivity value of cassette 1 with all cassettes.

9700 - option #7 (page 2) - second level option #2

=== SYSTEM SETUP: on/off setups ===== Page 2 ==


> #0. RETURN to PREVIOUS level
#1. Cassette type identification [on->off]
#2. PIO auto return [on->off]
#3. Ceph PIO auto return [on->off]
#?.

In normal use the C-arm will automatically return to the


PIO (Patient In Out) position when ever the arm is moved.
If any of the PIO sensors are broken the unit will not be
able to "find" the PIO position and it will not be possible to
take an exposure. This setup allows this feature to be
switched off.
Note that when the PIO auto return is switched off the C-
arm will not return automatically to the PIO position and
the E key must be pressed every time the C-arm is
moved.

9700 - option #7 (page 2) - second level option #3

=== SYSTEM SETUP: on/off setups ===== Page 2 ==


> #0.
#1.
RETURN to PREVIOUS level
Cassette type identification [on->off]
#2. PIO auto return [on->off]
#3. Ceph PIO auto return [on->off]
#?.

When taking a cephalometric exposure the C-arm will


automatically return to the cephalometric PIO (Patient In
Out) position when ever the arm is moved. If the ceph PIO
sensor is broken the unit will not be able to "find" the
PIO position and it will not be possible to take an expo-
sure.
With this setup switches this feature can be switched
off.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 33


5. Service Codes

Note that when the PIO auto return is switched off the C-
arm will not return automatically to the PIO position and
the E key must be pressed every time the C-arm is
moved.
Note that the PIO auto return feature can be temporarily
switched off (cannot be saved in the memory) using
service code 9775.

To switch the setups off:

1. Key in the number of the setup you wish to switch off.


The number will appear on the last line of the menu

=== SYSTEM SETUP: on/off setups ===== Page 2 ==


> #0.
#1.
RETURN to PREVIOUS level
Cassette type identification [on->off]
#2. PIO auto return [on->off]
#3. Ceph PIO auto return [on->off]
#?. 1

2. Press the E key. The on - off status at the end of the


setup line will change to off - on which indicates that
the setup has been switched off.

=== SYSTEM SETUP: on/off setups ===== Page 2 ==


> #0.
#1.
RETURN to PREVIOUS level
Cassette type identification [off->on]
#2. PIO auto return [on->off]
#3. Ceph PIO auto return [on->off]
#?.

3. To switch the setup back on again, repeat the above


procedure.
These setups can be permanently stored in the
memory. See section "Storing new settings".

5 - 34 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Code 9701: Manual switches not monitored


This code switches the manual switches off. These
switches monitor the positions of the manual settings that
the user selects when the unit is being prepared to take
an exposure. The switches include: primary aperture
selection, cassette head position, cassette shield posi-
tion, chin-rest position etc.

If any of the switches are broken the correct manual set-


ting will not be detected and the system prompt will re-
main on the display. The unit cannot be used when it is in
this state. When the manual switches are switched off
(not monitored) the prompt messages will not appear and
the unit can be used in the normal way.

CAUTION
Care must be taken when this option is used as is possi-
ble to take an exposures with incorrect settings, for exam-
ple a pan exposure with a tomo aperture.

IMPORTANT NOTE
To switch manual switch monitoring ON again switch unit
off and then on with the power switch.
This setting CANNOT be permanently stored in the
memory.

Code 9703: Exposure without movements


This service code allows an exposure to be taken without
the unit moving. This feature works with any imaging
program. If this code is selected and an oscilloscope is
connected to the X-ray generator the operation of the
generator can be checked.
Service code 9779 is dedicated for checking X-ray gen-
erator troubleshooting.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 35


5. Service Codes

Code 9711: Print menu


This code allows certain information to be sent from the
TOME to a PC and then printed.

Before this can be done a PC must be connected to the


Cranex Tome and a printer connected to the PC.

The information that can be sent to the PC and printed is:

=== Print Selections:=========================


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#3. Service codes and functions
#4. System info/settings report
#5. Exposure parameters default print format
#?.

9711 - option #1
The event log can be also be viewed on the control panel,
see code 9430.

1. Use the number keys to select option number 1 and


then press the E key.

=== Print Selections:=========================


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#3. Service codes and functions
#4. System info/settings report
#5. Exposure parameters default print format
#?. 1

Printing Event log ...


Record #: 10

The event log records will be sent to the PC. The records
are counted as they are sent.

The event log records will appear on the PC display as


follows:

5 - 36 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

970923,1345, 99, 1,MAN,70,10.0, 1,5,1,0.0, 1


PC 970923,1343,
970922,1744,
98, 1,MAN,70,10.0, 2,5,1,0.0, 2
97, 23,MAN,70,10.0, 3,2,3,0.0, 3
970922,1744, 96, 23,MAN,70,10.0, 2,2,3,0.0, 4
... ... ...
970805,1248, 3, 4,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 67
970805,1245, 2, 4,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 68
970710,1343, 1, 1,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 69

The line entries are, from left to right:

970923 = the date in years, months and days


1334 = the time in hours and minutes
99 = is the exposure counter number
1= the number of the imaging program
MAN = exposure taken using the manual mode
70 = the kV-setting used
10.0 = the mA-setting used
1 = the exposure time used (interrupted exposure)
5 = the patient size used
1 = the cassette type number
0.0 = the position of the focal trough
1 = the line number

9711 - option #2
The failure log can be also be viewed on the control
panel, see code 9431.

1. Use the number keys to select option number and


then press the E key.

=== Print Selections:=========================


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#3. Service codes and functions
#4. System info/settings report
#5. Exposure parameters default print format
#?. 2

Printing Failure log ...


Record #:10

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 37


5. Service Codes

The failure log records will be sent to the PC. The records
are counted as they are sent.

The failure log records will appear on the PC display as


follows:

971023,1345, 99, 1,MAN,70,10.0, 1,5,1,0.0, 1


PC 971023,1343,
970922,1744,
98, 1,MAN,70,10.0, 2,5,1,0.0, 2
97, 23,MAN,70,10.0, 3,2,3,0.0, 3
... ...
970322,1744, 4, 23,MAN,70,10.0, 2,2,3,0.0, 4
970305,1248, 3, 4,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 67
970305,1245, 2, 4,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 68
970210,1343, 1, 1,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 69

The format of the failure list is the same as the event log
list.

9711 - option #3
A list of the all the service codes and their titles can be
printed.

1. Use the number keys to select option number 3 and


then press the E key.

=== Print Selections:=========================


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#3. Service codes and functions
#4. System info/settings report
#5. Exposure parameters default print format
#?. 3

Printing All Service codes and titles ...

5 - 38 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

The service code list will be sent to the PC. Note that the
list does not include service code beginning with 99.

The service code list will appear on the PC display as


follows:

9301 — Parameters saved to into FLASH memory


PC 9411 — S/W-packages updating with the PC
9420 — X-ray tube list
9430 — Event log
9431 — Failure log
9700 — SYSTEM SETUP entry
9701 – Manual switches not monitored
9703 — Exposure without movements
9711 — Print menu
9712 — S/W packages version information
9718 — Service code list
9770 — H/W test menu
9775 — Patient In/Out position not monitored
9778 — Clear Exposure Counter and logs
9779 — X-ray generator test menu
9791 — Ceph Setup
=== Service Codes + Titles ====================

9711 - option #4
This option prints the unit settings
1. Use the number keys to select option number 4 and
then press the E key.

=== Print Selections:=========================


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#3. Service codes and functions
#4. System info/settings report
#5. Exposure parameters default print format
#?. 4

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 39


5. Service Codes

The unit settings will appear on the PC display as shown:

== SYSTEM INFO/SETTINGS ======= 1997.09.23 Tu 14:42


PC SRC1-type : [001-001]
N:[00070006]
Unit S/

X-ray tub : [0] COMET XL-90-5deg/04


EXP-count : [00000069]
Primary collimator : Large metric
Cassette SN: Cass : 09, Cass 2: 12, Cass 3: 05
CEPH: Left, V-offset : Beam Up [10] mm
CEPH: Filter-pos: Zero : 080, First:200, Last:255
Exposure print format : Not set
Application S/W-module : AP970923
Imaging S/W modules :
IA970922,IB970922,IC970922

If a cephalometric device not installed then the text


“CEPH: is missing” and no cephalometric settings will
appear.

We recommend that a copy of this setting printout be kept


as a record for all units installed. The information on this
printout can be useful if you need to contact the manufac-
turer for maintenance and repair services.

9711 - option #5
After an exposure has been taken it is possible for the
exposure parameters to be sent to the PC and, if re-
quired, printed. This option allows you to select the format
that the parameters will appear in when they are printed.
Note that the default setting of the unit is printing OFF.

1. Use the number keys to select option number 5 and


then press the E key.

=== Print Selections:=========================


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#3. Service codes and functions
#4. System info/settings report
#5. Exposure parameters default print format
#?. 5

5 - 40 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

A second-level menu will appear on the display. This


menu offers several options to switch printing on and an
option to switch printing off.

=== Exposure Print Format Selections:======


> #0.
#1.
RETURN to previous level
Disable exposure printing
#2. User Readable format
#3. Comma separated Data Base import format
#?.

— Store setting into memory with Store-menu

9711 - option #5 - second level option #1


Disable exposure printing.
This option allows printing to be switched off. Note that
either option 2 or 3 (described below) must be selected
before this option is used to switch printing off.

9711 - option #5 - second level option #2


User Readable format
This option allows you switch printing on. The format in
which the exposure parameters will appear is the same
as the format used in the event list.

Date Time ExpCtr Pgm Mod kV mA s PS Cas Y-Lr E


970923 1345 69 001 Man 70 10.0 1 5 1 0.0 *

9711 - option #5 - second level option #3


Database format
This option allows you switch printing on. The information
is sent in a format that allows the information to be
imported into a database.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 41


5. Service Codes

Code 9712: S/W packages version information


When the unit is switched on the system carries out a self
test during which software version information will appear
on the display.

This code allows you to display the software information


that appears on the display during start-up and a second
display that includes more detailed software version
information.

The information that will appear on the first screen is


shown below:

==================================================
== Imaging Elements Oper.System: AP970925 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #1: IA970924 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #2: IB970924 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #3: IC970924 ==
== Misc B-Mem Data and Software : DM970530 ==
== XRAY TUBE ID : 1 ==
==================================================
.. Validating SW-modules. Please wait.
Press any menu key

Press any key and a second screen will appear which


includes additional information.

==================================================
MEM1A Checksum: 0xFFFF Length 0xFFFFFFFF
AP970924 1A Sep 24 1997 (C) Soredex KPR
==================================================
MEM1B Checksum: 0xF39C Length 0x0009F398
IC970924 1B Sep 24 1997 (C) Soredex JPT
==================================================
MEM2A Checksum: 0x3414 Length 0x000CE08A
IA970924 2A Sep 24 1997 (C) Soredex JPT
==================================================
MEM2B Checksum: 0xDA54 Length 0x000CFABE
IB970924 2B Sep 24 1997 (C) Soredex JPT
==================================================

Press any menu key

5 - 42 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Code 9718: Service code list


This code displays a list of all the service codes and their
names. The list does not include codes used for testing
that begin with 99XX.

The list appears as follows:

=== Service Codes + Titles ====================


9301 — Parameters saved into FLASH memory
9411 — S/W-packages updating with the PC
9420 — X-ray tube list
9430 — Event log
9431 — Failure log
9700 — SYSTEM SETUP entry
9701 – Manual switches not monitored
9703 — Exposure without movements
9711 — Print menu
9712 — S/W packages version information
9718 — Service code list
=== Next Page : press any key ====

Press any key and the second part of the display will
appear.

=== Service Codes + Titles ====================


9770 — H/W test menu
9775 — Patient In/Out position not monitored
9778 — Clear Exposure Counter and logs
9779 — X-ray generator test menu
9791 — Ceph Setup
— EXIT by pressing any key

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 43


5. Service Codes

Code 9770: H/W test menu


This code allows various hardware tests to be carried out.
These tests can be use for fault finding during trouble-
shooting procedures.
The H/W test menu has two pages. Page 1:

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#3. Configuration load test
#4. Test lights (positioning, exposure)
#5. Endurance test (movements)
#6. Sensor tests
#7. Next Page, more tests
#?.

Page 2

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections (2):========


#0. RETURN to Previous Page
#1. Key-coding test
#2. Power signals to all opto-sensors ON
#3. Main power supply voltage A/D test
#4. PAN cassette identification test
#5. RS232 Transmit/Receive Test
#?.

9770 - option #1 (page 1)


If a PC is connected to the unit via the PC RS232 con-
nection this option will information that appears on the
display to be sent to the PC stored and, if required,
printed.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#3. Configuration load test
#4. Test lights (positioning, exposure)
#5. Endurance test (movements)
#6. Sensor tests
#7. Next Page, more tests
#?. 1

5 - 44 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Select option 1 and press the E key to switch the option


off. Repeating the procedure will switch the option back
on again.

9770 - option #2 (page 1)


This option allows certain PCB's to be checked to see if
they are functioning correctly

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#3. Configuration load test
#4. Test lights (positioning, exposure)
#5. Endurance test (movements)
#6. Sensor tests
#7. Next Page, more tests
#?. 2

Select option 2 and then press the E key. The diagnostic


test will start.
If the SPI communication between the circuit boards is
functioning correctly the information shown below will
appear on the display.

=== H/W Diagnostic tests:==========


> — Start Self Test...
— ONLY DETECTED ERRORS ARE DISPLAYED
.. CU2 [spi] test over
.. CU1 [spi] test over
.. THC [spi] test over
.. CHC [spi] test over
.. ADCs [spi] test over
.. Chin rest position test over
.. CIU [spi] test over

Press any menu key

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 45


5. Service Codes

The boards listed on the test menu are as follows:


CU2 - N900
CU1 - N100
THC - N1400
CHC - N1200
ADCs - N600
Chin rest position - micro switches
CIU - N1700

If any of the boards is faulty an error message will appear


on the display indicating the faulty board.

9770 - option #3 (page 1)


During the start-up self diagnostic test, the configuration
of the unit, its settings and calibrations are checked. If
there is a configuration error this option allows you to
check the configuration memory again.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#3. Configuration load test
#4. Test lights (positioning, exposure)
#5. Endurance test (movements)
#6. Sensor tests
#7. Next Page, more tests
#?. 3

Select option 3 and then press the E key. If there are


configuration errors detailed information will appear on
the display. Configuration errors normally indicate that
the ram memory module N650 (RMM) is malfunctioning,
and it should be replaced.
Note that this feature is still reserved for future expan-
sion.

— Localization data not set


> — Local time data not set

Press any menu key

5 - 46 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

9770 - option #4 (page 1)


This option allows the patient positioning lights and the
exposure warning light to be tested. This test is low level
test and there is no software control involved with, for
example the control data of the imaging programs.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#3. Configuration load test
#4. Test lights (positioning, exposure)
#5. Endurance test (movements)
#6. Sensor tests
#7. Next Page, more tests
#?. 4

Select option 4 and then press the E key. A second menu


will appear that allows you to select the lights you wish to
test.

=== Positioning and EXP Lights test:====


> #0.
#1.
RETURN to PREVIOUS level
Y1 (Layer/Front) and XZ-lights On
#2. Y2 (TMJ/Back) and XZ-lights On
#3. Exposure light On
#?.

To test the lights key in the number for the lights you wish
to test. Press the E key and the lights will come on.
#1- the midsagittal light, the Frankfort light and the focal
trough light will come on

#2- the midsagittal light, the Frankfort light and the TMJ
light will come on

#3- the exposure warning lights will come on

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 47


5. Service Codes

9770 - option #5 (page 1)


This option is used during manufacture and during normal
servicing is not used.
The option allows you to change the function of test code
9976 - Mechanical endurance test (described later). Test
code 9976 is used to check the movements of the unit.
After the code has been selected the exposure switch is
pressed and held down. The unit will carry out one com-
plete movement cycle and then stop.

When option #5 is selected the function of test code 9976


changes from the single cycle movement test to a continu-
ous movement test.

To change the function of test code 9976 select option 5


and then press the E key.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#3. Configuration load test
#4. Test lights (positioning, exposure)
#5. Endurance test (movements)
#6. Sensor tests
#7. Next Page, more tests
#?. 5

Select option 5 and then press the E key. A second menu


will appear that allows you to select the lights you wish to
test.
A text stating that the continuous endurance test mode
has been enabled will appear on the display.

== ENDURANCE Test for movements ENABLED ==


> == Disabling: Turn unit power OFF

Press any menu key

Press any key to return to the previous menu.


Now when test code 9976 is selected the unit will con-
tinue to carry out movement cycles, as long as the expo-
sure switch is pressed and held down, instead of carrying
out a single movement cycle.
Note that to return to the single cycle movement mode the
unit must be switched off and then on again.

5 - 48 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

9770 - option #6 (page 1)


This option allows you to check the option of the optical
sensors.

Maybe the most useful option for maintenance purposes


is menu selection six. It is the screen for testing system’s
optical sensors. It is strongly recommended to use it for
troubleshooting e.g. when unit do not find the patient in/
out (PIO) position.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#3. Configuration load test
#4. Test lights (positioning, exposure)
#5. Endurance test (movements)
#6. Sensor tests
#7. Next Page, more tests
#?. 6

Select option 6 and then press the E key. An information


display will appear that allows you to see if the optical
sensors that detect the unit positions are working or not.

R -125 -90 -70 70 125


> (101) +------*----+----------------+----------+
X -77 20 77 Z Bottom Top
(01) +----------*------+ (00) +---- ----+
Y -9 122 147 Chin Down Up
(01) +-------------*---+ rest +******+-----+
V -10 0 10 Cass Pan Ceph
(01) +--------*---------+ head +******+-----+
C -12 205 310 Sec Pan Tomo
(01) +-----------*-----+ slit +******+-----+
Cass type: (01) 1 Prim
Mirror : (0) CLOSE slit: (1000) 1

optosensors: 1=light, 0=no light


PRESS ANY MENU KEY TO RETURN TO PREVIOUS MENU

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 49


5. Service Codes

On the display there are a number of lines that indicate


the different movements that the unit makes.
The movements are as follows:
R = C-arm rotation

X = C-arm backwards/forwards direction

Y = C-arm left/right direction

V = C-arm tilt

C =Cassette carriage

Z = Height

The other information on the display is:


Cass type = The cassette sensitivity number - 1, 2 or 3

Mirror = Mirror position - open or closed

Chin = Chin rest position - up or down

Cass = Cassette type - panoramic or cephalometric

Sec slit = Cassette shields - pan (closed) or tomo (open)

Prim slit = Primary aperture number - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, (8)

To check if an optical sensor (or microswitch) is working


manually move the part of the unit that activates the opti-
cal sensor, or microswitch you wish to check. The dashes
(-) in the line on the display next to the sensor you are
checking will change to stars (*). This indicates that the
sensor is working correctly. If the dashes do not change it
indicates that there is something wrong with the sensor or
microswitch or the circuits that operate them.

5 - 50 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

For example, when the unit is in the PIO position the


movement line for C-arm rotation will be all dashes.

R -125 -90 -70 70 125


(101) +-----*----+----------------+----------+

If you manually rotate the C-arm slightly some of the


dashes will change to stars. This indicates that the sensor
is working correctly.

R -125 -90 -70 70 125


(101) +*****x----+----------------+----------+

The position and number of dashes that change will


depend on the direction and amount that the arm is
moved

The numbers at the beginning and end of the lines are the
movement limits and the numbers along the line are PIO
positions. For R and V the limits are in degrees and for X,
Y and C they are in millimetres.

For example, the movement limits for R, C-arm rotation,


are from -1250 to +1250. The -90 is the PIO position of the
C-arm for pan, scano and tomo exposures. The -70 is the
PIO position for the left-hand ceph and the 70 the PIO
position for the right-hand ceph.
Pan PIO L-H Ceph R-H Ceph
Rotation limit position PIO position PIO position Rotation limit

R -125 -90 -70 70 125


(101) +-----*----+----------------+----------+

Whenever a part of the unit controlled by these sensors or


microswitches is moved to a new position the sensor
information on the display is automatically updated.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 51


5. Service Codes

9770 - option #7 (page 1)

This option opens the second page of the hardware


diagnostic menu.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#3. Configuration load test
#4. Test lights (positioning, exposure)
#5. Endurance test (movements)
#6. Sensor tests
#7. Next Page, more tests
#?. 7

Select option 7 and then press the E key. The second


page of the menu will appear on the display.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections (2):========


#0. RETURN to Previous Page
#1. Key-coding test
#2. Power signals to all opto-sensors ON
#3. Main power supply voltage A/D test
#4. PAN cassette identification test
#5. RS232 Transmit/Receive Test
#?.

5 - 52 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

9770 - option #1 (page 2)


If one or more of the control panel keys does not appear
to operate, this option allows the keys to be tested.

Select option 1 and then press the E key.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections (2):========


#0. RETURN to Previous Page
#1. Key-coding test
#2. Power signals to all opto-sensors ON
#3. Main power supply voltage A/D test
#4. PAN cassette identification test
#5. RS232 Transmit/Receive Test
#?. 1

A message telling you how to exit the key test will appear
on the display.

####### To STOP: cycle power ######


>
Press the key you wish to test. If the key is working cor-
rectly key information will appear on the display.

####### To STOP: cycle power ######


> BK = 0x00 RK = 0x03
Y-key = 0x202, Z-key = 0x1FE, Z-ceph= 0x1F4

The first information line allows you to check the function


of all keys except the movement keys - focal trough and
height adjustment. BK is the “BIOS key” and RK is “read
key”. The RK value is the most important. It must change
when a display key is pressed. If does not the control
panel is faulty and must be replaced.

In the second information line the Y-key is for checking the


function of the focal trough adjustment keys. When either
focal trough key is pressed the value should change. If it
does not either the control panel is faulty, the signal to
the control panel is cut or the A/D converter is not func-
tioning. The Z-key is for checking the function of the
height adjusting keys that are on the display, and the Z-
ceph for checking the height adjustment keys on the side
of the ceph unit.

To exit this menu the unit must be switched off and then
switched on using the main power switch.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 53


5. Service Codes

9770 - option #2 (page 2)


This option allows the power supply to all the opto sen-
sors to be switched at the same time.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections (2):========


#0. RETURN to Previous Page
#1. Key-coding test
#2. Power signals to all opto-sensors ON
#3. Main power supply voltage A/D test
#4. PAN cassette identification test
#5. RS232 Transmit/Receive Test
#?. 2

Select option 2 and then press the E key.


Power is now supplied to all the optical sensors. It is now
possible to check if the opto-sensors are functioning
correctly with a digital multimeter.

— All Sensor Powers Are On


> — Press Any Key set them off and exit

To switch the power to all the opto-sensors off, press any


key. The menu will reappear on the display.

9770 - option #3 (page 2)


This option allows the voltage of the main power supply to
be checked.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections (2):========


#0. RETURN to Previous Page
#1. Key-coding test
#2. Power signals to all opto-sensors ON
#3. Main power supply voltage A/D test
#4. PAN cassette identification test
#5. RS232 Transmit/Receive Test
#?. 3

5 - 54 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Select option 3 and then press the E key.


Voltage information will appear on the display.

== Main Voltage measurement A/D-hexa values


> ==
==
115V 8-bit A/D (min/max) : 0x31/0x45
220/240V 8-bit A/D (min/max) : 0x66/0x9B
-- EXIT by pressing any key
-- Main Volt. A/D-values (raw/filtered): 0x1F2/7C

The values are read from the A/D converter and are in
hexidecimal form. This menu only indicates if the power
supply is acceptable or if the voltage is too low. If the
value 0x00 appears it can mean that the signal is cut or
the A/D-converter is not working.
The first value in the last line (eg. =0x1F2) must be be-
tween the corresponding values for 115V and 220/240V.

9770 - option #4 (page 2)


This option allows you to check if the unit can identify the
different cassette types.

IMPORTANT NOTE
The cassettes must have the cassette identification stick-
ers attached to them. In addition the S/N values for these
cassettes must be programmed into the unit. For informa-
tion on how to do this refer the installation manual.

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections (2):========


#0. RETURN to Previous Page
#1. Key-coding test
#2. Power signals to all opto-sensors ON
#3. Main power supply voltage A/D test
#4. PAN cassette identification test
#5. RS232 Transmit/Receive Test
#?. 4

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 55


5. Service Codes

Select option 4 and then press the E key.

The cassette identification screen will appear on the


display.

== Cassette type opto input data =================


> --
--
EXIT by pressing any key
Cassette binary input data [0=Black,1=White]
-- Type1: 10, Type2: 01, Type3 : 11, missing: 00
-- Type bit order b1b0: 10

The identification stickers attached to the cassettes


enable the cassette sensors to identify the different cas-
settes.
Slide a cassette into the cassette carriage and the binary
number on the last line of the display should change. If the
number does not change the unit cannot "see" the sticker
coding, white squares on a black background, and cannot
identify the cassette.
If the unit does not recognise a cassette either the sticker
has not been attached to the cassette, the sticker has
been attached in the wrong position, the cassette has
been placed in the cassette holder the wrong way round
or the cassette sensors are not working. To check if the
cassette sensors are working use option #2 - Power
signals to all opto sensors, described earlier.

9770 - option #4 (page 2)


If a PC is connected to the unit using the serial interface
cable RS232, this option allows you to check if this
connection can transmit and receive data..

=== H/W Diagnostic Selections (2):========


#0. RETURN to Previous Page
#1. Key-coding test
#2. Power signals to all opto-sensors ON
#3. Main power supply voltage A/D test
#4. PAN cassette identification test
#5. RS232 Transmit/Receive Test

5 - 56 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

#?. 5

Select option 5 and then press the E key.


Instructions explaining how to test the communication link
will appear on the display.

-- Use RS232 test tool or connect D9 female pins


> -- 2 and 3 (TX/RX). Press any key when ready.

The lead that transmits data must be connected to the


Pin 3 lead that receives data. To do this disconnect the RS232
serial cable from the rear of the PC and, using the RS232
Pin 2 test tool or a small length of wire, connect (short-circuit)
pins 2 and 3 on the 9-pin D connector at the end of the
cable (if easier you can remove the serial cable from the
Tome and short-circuit the same pins on the connector at
the rear of the Tome).

Press any key. The unit will send a test message (string of
characters) to check the communication link.
Status information will appear on the display.

-- Use RS232 test tool or connect D9 female pins


>> -- 2 and 3 (TX/RX). Press any key when ready.
--> TX: Sent test text : 0123456789ABCDEF
<-- RX: Received test text: 0123456789ABCDEF
(!! RS232 OK !!)

If the communication link is working correctly the TX


(Send test text) test message will be the same as the RX
(Receive test text) test message. The text RS232 OK will
appear on the last line of the display

If the RX text is not the same as the TX text the commu-


nication link is not working correctly.

-- Use RS232 test tool or connect D9 female pins


>> -- 2 and 3 (TX/RX). Press any key when ready.
--> TX: Sent test text : 0123456789ABCDEF
<-- RX: Received test text: — nothing—
## RS232 FAILURE: Test text receiving error
## Check cables !!
-- Press any key to exit

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 57


5. Service Codes

Code 9775: Patient In/Out position not monitored


This code allows the PIO position sensors to be tempo-
rarily switched off so that the PIO auto return does not
operate. This setting using this code CANNOT be saved
in the memory. When the unit is switched off and then on
again PIO auto return will be automatically switched on
again.

NOTE
If you wish to permanently switch PIO auto return off you
must use service code 9700, page 2 (on/off setups),
option 2 - Pio auto return.

5 - 58 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Code 9778: Clear Exposure Counter and logs


This code allows all the information in the event and
failure logs to be deleted. When deleted the and the
exposure counters will start from one again.

##################################################
# WARNING. This will clear the Exposure Counter, #
# Event Log and Failure Log. #
##################################################

#0. Exit
#1. CLEAR
#?.

To clear the logs select option 1 and press the E key. A


message will appear on the display and you will hear an
audible signal which indicates that the logs are being
deleted.

##################################################
# WARNING. This will clear the Exposure Counter, #
# Event Log and Failure Log. #
##################################################

#0. Exit
#1. CLEAR
#?. 1
-- Clearing Exposure data. Wait...

When the audible tone stops a message will appear on


the display stating that the log information has been
deleted.

##################################################
# WARNING. This will clear the Exposure Counter, #
# Event Log and Failure Log. #
##################################################

#0. Exit
#1. CLEAR
#?. 1
-- Clearing Exposure data. Wait...
-- Exposure data cleared. Cycle power!

Press any menu key

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 59


5. Service Codes

Code 9779: X-ray generator test menu


This service code includes a number of tests that allows
the X-ray generator and tubehead to be tested.

CAUTION
With these test programs the unit does not have to be set
up to take an exposure, nor does the C-arm move when
radiation is generated. Protect yourself from radiation
when using these programs.

For more information on how to troubleshoot the X-ray


generator and tubehead refer to section 7 - Trouble
Shooting, Generator problems.

=== X-ray Generator Test Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Exposure with kV,mA,time
#2. Exposure sequence test
#3. Exposure sequence diagram
#?.

9779 - option #1
This option allows the X-ray generator to be tested using
preselected kV, mA, and time values.

Select option 1 and then press the E key.

=== X-ray Generator Test Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Exposure with kV,mA,time
#2. Exposure sequence test
#3. Exposure sequence diagram
#?. 1

A second menu will appear.

====== X-ray Generator Test Settings ====


> == kV : 50,..,85 : step 1
== mA : 1.0,..,15.0 : step 0.5 mA
kV ==
==
== sec: 0.1,..,10.0 : step 0.1 sec ==
=========================================
#0. Exit
#1. kV [60]
#2. mA [5.0]
#3. time [1.0]
#4. OK, ready for exposure
#?.

5 - 60 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

This menu lists the maximum and minimum exposure


values and offers a number of options that allow you to
change the exposure values. The default values are given
in brackets, for example #1. kV is (60).

Select the number for the exposure parameter you wish to


change, for example for kV select 1, and press the E key.

====== X-ray Generator Test Settings ====


> == kV : 50,..,85 : step 1 kV
== mA : 1.0,..,15.0 : step 0.5 mA
==
==
== sec: 0.1,..,10.0 : step 0.1 sec ==
=========================================
#0. Exit
#1. kV [60]
#2. mA [5.0]
#3. time [1.0]
#4. OK, ready for exposure
#?. 1 kV :

Key in a new exposure value, it will appear on the last line


of the menu, and press the E key.

====== X-ray Generator Test Settings ====


> == kV : 50,..,85 : step 1
== mA : 1.0,..,15.0 : step 0.5 mA
kV ==
==
== sec: 0.1,..,10.0 : step 0.1 sec ==
=========================================
#0. Exit
#1. kV [50] New exposure value
#2. mA [5.0]
#3. time [1.0]
#4. OK, ready for exposure
#?.

The new value will appear in the brackets.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 61


5. Service Codes

Change any other exposure parameters, mA and time, in


the same way.

The kV value can be set from 50 to 85 in 1 kV steps.


The mA value can be set from 1.0 to 15.0 in 0.5 mA
steps. The exposure time can be set from 0.1 to 10.0 in
0.1 second steps.

To activate the test select option 4 and press the E key. A


text confirming the selected exposure values will appear
on the display.

kV=60 mA=5.0 preheat A/D=0x6A T=1.0 sec


>> ... READY, Press EXPOSURE button...
... EXIT by pressing any key.......

WARNING
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM RADIATION
Press and hold down the exposure button. The exposure
warning lights will come on and you will hear an audible
signal. These indicate that the tubehead has been
switched on and X-rays are being generated.

kV=60 mA=5.0 preheat A/D=0x6A T=1.0 sec


>> ... READY, Press EXPOSURE button...
... EXIT by pressing any key.......

... OK. EXPOSURE now ON!

EXPOSURE TIME [sec] : 1

Hold the exposure button down for the duration of the


exposure (the time selected). When the warning lights
go out and the signal tone stops the exposure is com-
plete.

When the exposure is over generator feedback values for


the kV and mA values will appear on the display. These
values are measured by the A/D-converter. A wait counter
protects the X-ray tube from overheating.

feedback-kV = 58 , feedback mA = 0.4


Exposure Time = 1.0 sec

WAIT : 30 sec

5 - 62 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

This test will give a warning if there is a kV-failure, a time-


out failure of if the tube overheats.

=== X-ray Tube PROTECTION============


### KV-FAILURE detected
or
### GENERATOR TIME-OUT FAILURE detected
or
### TUBEHOT detected, wait..

Press any menu key

If any of these errors occur during the test a message will


appear on the display. If this occurs there is a problem
with the generator or tubehead and a full generator test
must be carried out. This test is option #2 - Exposure
sequence test, and then option #1 - Analyze generator.
The test is described below.

9779 - option #2
This option offers a number of tests that can be used to
analyse the X-ray generator H/W during different operat-
ing phases.

=== X-ray Generator Test Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Exposure with kV,mA,time
#2. Exposure sequence test
#3. Exposure sequence diagram
#?. 2

Select option 2 and then press the E key a second menu


will appear on the display.

=== X-ray generator sequence test ===


> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#2. Tube voltage without current
#3. Exposure with filament feedback
#4. X-ray tube filament heating
#5. Filament feedback [off->ON]
#?.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 63


5. Service Codes

9779 - option #2, second level option #1


Analyze generator is the most complete test. It tests the
generator in different operating phases and modes. If an
error occurs during this test it must be fixed and the gen-
erator analysed again.

To analyse the generator select option 1 and press the E


key.

=== X-ray generator sequence test ===


> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#2. Tube voltage without current
#3. Exposure with filament feedback
#4. X-ray tube filament heating
#5. Filament feedback [off->ON]
#?. 1

A warning message will appear on the display.

Protect yourself from radiation.


>> Press and hold exposure button until exposure
lights are turned off.

If you do not wish to continue with this test press any key
to return to the previous menu.

WARNING
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM RADIATION
Press and hold down the exposure button. The exposure
warning lights will come on and you will hear an audible
signal. These indicate that the tubehead has been
switched on and X-rays are being generated.

Hold the exposure button down for the duration of the test.
During the test information will appear on the display as
the X-ray generator is checked.

When the warning lights go out and the signal tone stops
the test is complete.

5 - 64 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

The results of the X-ray generator test will appear on the


display, example below. If all the tests were successful the
X-ray generator is functioning correctly.

Tube Voltage:__57__60__63__66__70__73__77__81__85
>> kV test passed...
mA control check: passed...
Tube current:__1.0__1.3__1.6__2.0__2.5__3.2__4.0
__5.0__6.4__8.0__10.0__13.0__15.0
mA check passed...
Tube Voltage:__57__60__63__66__70__73__77__81__85
kV check passed.
Generator OK.

WAIT : 270 sec

If the unit does not pass the generator test an error mes-
sage will appear on the display, for example:

KVFBM error. xxV detected, 0V expected.

A list of generator test error messages and information on


what to do is given in section 7 - Trouble Shooting, Gen-
erator Problems,

9779 - option #2, second level option #2


This option allows you to test the H/W backup timer of
the X-ray generator.

=== X-ray generator sequence test ===


> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#2. Tube voltage without current
#3. Exposure with filament feedback
#4. X-ray tube filament heating
#5. Filament feedback [off->on]
#?. 2

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 65


5. Service Codes

To start the test select option 2 and press the E key. A


message telling you how to carry out the test will appear
on the display.

Protect yourself from radiation.


>> Press exposure button during measurement.
Press C-key to quit EXPOSURE ON.

If you do not wish to continue with this test press the C key
to return to the previous menu.

WARNING
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM RADIATION
Press and hold down the exposure button. The exposure
warning lights will come on and you will hear an audible
signal. These indicate that the tubehead has been
switched on and X-rays are being generated.

Hold the exposure button down until the warning lights go


out and the signal tone stops. The test will last approxi-
mately 50 seconds.

After the test a message will appear on the display indi-


cating if the H/W timer is working or not.
The message below indicates that the H/W timer stopped
the exposure and is, therefore, working correctly.

Hardware backup timer interupt.OK.


>> Press any menu key

If the message below appears it indicates that the H/W


backup timer failed and the S/W backup timer has
stopped the exposure. In this case the N1000 board must
be changed.

ERROR: Hardware backup timer NOT OK.


>> Press any menu key

5 - 66 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

9779 - option #2, second level option #3


This option allows you to measure the DC voltage. The
mA reference voltage (MAREF) must within a certain
range. For more information refer to "Generator Prob-
lems" in section 7.

=== X-ray generator sequence test ===


> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#2. Tube voltage without current
#3. Exposure with filament feedback
#4. X-ray tube filament heating
#5. Filament feedback [off->ON]
#?. 3

To start the test select option 3 and press the E key. A


message telling you how to carry out the test will appear
on the display.

Protect yourself from radiation.


>> Press exposure button during measurement.
Press C-key to quit.

MAREF voltage is between 3.3VDC and 4.0VDC

If you do not wish to continue with this test press the C


key to return to the previous menu.

WARNING
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM RADIATION
Press and hold down the exposure button. The exposure
warning lights will come on and you will hear an audible
signal. These indicate that the tubehead has been
switched on and X-rays are being generated.

From test pin 17 on the N1100 board measure the volt-


age. It must be between 3.3 and 4.0 VDC.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 67


5. Service Codes

While the exposure button is held down the message


exposure on will appear on the display.

EXPOSURE ON.

When the exposure button is released the message


exposure off will appear.

EXPOSURE OFF.

9779 - option #2, second level option #4


This option allows X-ray tube filament heating to be
switched on.

=== X-ray generator sequence test ===


> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#2. Tube voltage without current
#3. Exposure with filament feedback
#4. X-ray tube filament heating
#5. Filament feedback [off->ON]
#?. 4

To switch X-ray tube filament heating on select option 4


and press the E key. Note that the exposure button does
not need to be pressed. A message will appear on the
display describing the test and giving the mA reference
(MAREF) voltage range

Filament heating is ON 30 seconds or until C-key


>> is pressed.

MAREF voltage is between 3.3VDC and 4.0VDC

During the heating period the mA reference can be meas-


ured from test pin 17 on the N1100 board.

5 - 68 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

After 30 seconds the filament heating will be automati-


cally switched off. To repeat the test press the E key and
to exit the test press the C key.

Filament heating is ON 30 seconds or until C-key


>> is pressed.

MAREF voltage is between 3.3VDC and 4.0VDC

Filament heating OFF.


Press E-key to switch filament ON again.
C-key to quit.

To repeat the test press the E key and to exit the test
press the C key.

9779 - option #2, second level option #5


This option allows the filament feedback signal to be
switched on or off.

The text [off->on] indicates that signal is off.

=== X-ray generator sequence test ===


> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#2. Tube voltage without current
#3. Exposure with filament feedback
#4. X-ray tube filament heating
#5. Filament feedback [off->on]
#?. 5

To switch the signal on select option 5 and press the E


key. The text will change to [on->off] which indicates that
the signal is on.

=== X-ray generator sequence test ===


> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#2. Tube voltage without current
#3. Exposure with filament feedback
#4. X-ray tube filament heating
#5. Filament feedback [on->off]
#?. 5

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 69


5. Service Codes

9779 - option #3
This option displays a simplified diagram of the X-ray
generator signals.

=== X-ray Generator Test Selections:==========


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Exposure with kV,mA,time
#2. Exposure sequence test
#3. Exposure sequence diagram
#?. 3

To display the diagram select option 3 and then press the


E key. The generator signal diagram will appear on the
display.

AVC* —--. .-----


!____ ...... ____________ ... _____!
HEAT* ---. .-----
!____ ...... ____________ ... _____!
F/MA* ---+---- ...... --------. -----
!____ ... _____!
EXPC2* ---!---- ...... ------. .-----
!______ ... _____! time
----------0------------------+-+--------------+-----
A <--- 1 SEC --> A 10 msec A EXP
!__ HEAT begins !__ EXP begins !___
! !ends
O O
HEAT mA-val set mA-val min(mA)
min(kV) set kV-val min(kV)
>>>>>>>PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN PREVIOUS MENU<<<<<<<

The diagram shows the relationship between the main


generator controls signals, AVC, HEAT, F/MA and EXPC
during the exposure cycle.

5 - 70 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Code 9791: Ceph Setup


This service code is the same ceph setup procedure that
is included in service code 9700. For information on how
to use this service code refer to SERVICE CODE 9700
option #4.

=== Ceph: Installation setup ==================


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities —————————
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 71


5. Service Codes

Movement and alignment codes


Service codes 9960 to 9964 are used to check the unit
movements. The movements need to be checked indi-
vidually if there are problems with the stepper motors and
if the motors are replaced.
Note that the exposure button needs to be pressed and
held down to activate a motor. However, with these serv-
ice codes X-rays are not generated when the exposure
button is pressed.

NOTE
The directions of all movements are described when
looking directly at the unit.

Code 9960: X movement test


This code allows the X movement (left/right) of the C-arm
to be checked. When the exposure button is pressed the
C-arm will move to the ready position and then move to
the left, the right, and then back to the left again. At the
end of the movement cycle the C-arm will stop.

Code 9961: Y movement test


This code allows the Y movement (towards and away
from the column) of the C-arm to be checked. When the
exposure button is pressed the C-arm will move to the
ready position and then move towards the column and
then away from the column. At the end of the movement
cycle the C-arm will stop.

Code 9962: r movement test


This code allows the r movement (rotation) of the C-arm
to be checked. When the exposure button is pressed the
C-arm will move to the ready position and then rotate in
one direction, and then rotate back to the original posi-
tion. At the end of the movement cycle the C-arm will stop.

Code 9963: v movement test


This code allows the V movement (tilt) of the C-arm to be
checked. When the exposure button is pressed the C-
arm will tilt in one direction and then the other. At the end
of the movement cycle the C-arm will stop.

5 - 72 Cranex Tome Service Manual


5. Service Codes

Code 9964: c movement test


This code allows the movement of the cassette carriage
to be checked. When the exposure button is pressed the
cassette carriage will move first in one direction and then
in the other. At the end of the movement cycle the cas-
sette carriage will stop.

The service codes 9970, 9972 to 9975, 9977 and 9978


are used to check the alignment of the unit. Full descrip-
tions of how these codes are used is given in the installa-
tion manual.

WARNING
All these codes activate special exposure programs that
are used to check the alignment of the unit. With all these
codes the exposure button must be pressed and held
down to "take an exposure". Therefore, always protect
yourself from radiation when using these codes

Code 9970: Alignment check program


Not for service use.

Code 9971: Alignment program for rotation


Not for service use.

Code 9973: Maint Gear ratio test for C movement


WARNING
Protect yourself from radiation when using this code.

This code allows the movement and movement limits of


the cassette carriage to be checked.

Code 9974: Maint X-ray beam center test


WARNING
Protect yourself from radiation when using this code.

This code takes a series of exposure "lines" as the C-


arm rotates that allow the position of the centre of rota-
tion to be checked.

Doc. code 8200629 5 - 73


5. Service Codes

Code 9975: Multipurpose test exposure (13.5 s)


WARNING
Protect yourself from radiation when using this code.

This code allows a "panoramic" exposure to be taken


without the C-arm rotating. It is used to check the position
of the secondary slit.

Code 9976: Mechanical endurance test


Not for service use.

Code 9977: Maint Beam alignment test


WARNING
Protect yourself from radiation when using this code.

This code takes a series of exposures "lines" as the C-


arm rotates that allow the PIO (patient in/out) position to
be checked.

Code 9978: Exposure timeout test (35 s)


This code checks that the H/W timer that limits the length
of time that X-rays can be generated is operating cor-
rectly. The time must be limited for patient safety and to
protect the tube from overheating.

To select the code key in the service number and press


the E key.

WARNING
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM RADIATION
Press and hold down the exposure button. The exposure
warning lights will come on and you will hear an audible
signal. These indicate that the tubehead has been
switched on and X-rays are being generated.
During the test the exposure time, in seconds, and a
progress bar will appear on the display.

If the H/W timer is working correctly the text below will


appear on the display in the info line.

GENERATOR TIME-OUT control - Press C

If the H/W timer is not working correctly the text below


will appear:

GENERATOR TIME-OUT FAILURE detected

5 - 74 Cranex Tome Service Manual


6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome Con-
tents
6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome
Contents
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 6-1
PC requirements ................................................................................................ 6-1
Connecting the PC to the Tome ....................................................................... 6-1
Down loading information from the Tome ....................................................... 6-2
Setting up a connection to the Tome ................................................................ 6-2
Sending information from the Tome to the PC ................................................. 6-6
Saving the information in the PC ...................................................................... 6-8

Doc. code 8200629 6-i


Contents 6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

6 - ii Cranex Tome Service


Manual
6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

Introduction
A personal computer can be connected to the Tome with
the RS23 serial interface cable (part number 4801199).
Information stored in the Tome, such as the event and
error lists, can then be sent to the PC, examined, printed
and, if required, archived.
In addition, the Tome software can be upgraded using
the PC.

PC requirements
The minimum requirements for the PC are:
- PC 486/66MHz with 8MB RAM

- a hard disk with at least 200 MB of storage

- running Microsoft Windows 95® or above with


HyperTerminal®

Connecting the PC to the Tome


Connect one end of the RS232 serial interface cable to
the to the RS connector at the rear of the Tome (the 9-
pin D connector), and the other end of the cable to the
COM1 communication port at the rear of the PC. If the
COM 1 port is already in use connect the interface cable
to any other free communication port.

Switch the PC and the Tome on.

Doc. code 8200629 6-1


6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

Down loading information from the Tome

Setting up a connection to the Tome


1. Using the PC, open the Microsoft Windows
HyperTerminal window. Refer to the Windows soft-
ware documentation for information on how to do
this.
Open the HyperTerminal program by double clicking
the Hypertrm.exe item.

2. A window will appear that allows you to open a


connection in the PC to the Cranex Tome. Key in the
name you wish to give to the connection, for exam-
ple CRANEX TOME. Select the icon you require.
Press the OK button.

6-2 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

3. A window in which connection information must be


entered will appear.
Click the down arrow in the "Connect using" box and
select the same Com number that you connected the
RS serial interface cable to. For example if you
connected the RS cable to COM 1 select "Direct to
Com 1".

Click the OK button.

Note that when you select a Com number the other


selection boxes will become grey.

Doc. code 8200629 6-3


6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

3. A properties window will appear.


In the "Bits per second" box select 19200 and in the
"Flow control" box select None.
Press the OK button.

4. A HyperTerminal window will appear indicating that


the PC is connected to the Tome.

6-4 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

IMPORTANT NOTE
When you disconnect the connection save the session
profile (connection name and parameters) so that the
connection can be quickly reopened the next time it is
required.

When the session is saved the name and icon will ap-
pear in the HyperTerminal window. To reopen the con-
nection simply double click this icon.

Tome connection

Doc. code 8200629 6-5


6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

Sending information from the Tome to the PC


1. Make sure that the PC connection to the Tome is
open.

2. Using the Tome control panel select service code


9711.
If you do not know how to do this refer to the section
"Service Codes".
A menu listing printable items will appear on the
display.

=== Print Selections:=========================


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#3. Service codes and functions
#4. System info/settings report
#5. Exposure parameters default print format
#?.

6-6 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

3. Select the number of the item you wish to print, for


example press 1 for the event list, and then press
the E key.

=== Print Selections:=========================


#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#3. Service codes and functions
#4. System info/settings report
#5. Exposure parameters default print format
#?. 1

Printing Event log ...


Record #: 10

The event log records will be sent to the PC. The


records will be counted as they are sent and will
appear line by line on the PC display.

NOTE
If no information appears on the PC display you can
check that the RS cable is working correctly by using
service code 9770 - H/W Diagnostic Selections, page 2
option 5 - RS23 Transmit/Receive Test. Refer to the
section "Service Code" for information on how to do this.

Doc. code 8200629 6-7


6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

Saving the information in the PC


1. From the "Transfer" menu select "Capture Text...".

NOTE - Do NOT use the File/Save option.

A window will appear in which the name of the folder


in which the information will be stored and a sug-
gested name for the information file are given.
If require key in a new folder name and file name.
Press the OK button.

The information will be stored.

6-8 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting Con-
tents
7. Trouble Shooting
Contents
Warnings and precautions ................................................................................ 7-1
Warning - X-rays ............................................................................................. 7-1
Warning - Electric shock .................................................................................. 7-1
Warning - High voltage ..................................................................................... 7-1
Caution - Static discharge ................................................................................ 7-1
Trouble shooting principles .............................................................................. 7-2
Circuit boards .................................................................................................. 7-2
Indicator LEDs ................................................................................................. 7-2
Test pins .......................................................................................................... 7-3
Check cables ................................................................................................... 7-4
Image quality ................................................................................................... 7-5
Power supply problems ................................................................................... 7-6
Display problems ............................................................................................. 7-7
Problems during start-up ................................................................................ 7-11
The unit selftest ............................................................................................. 7-11
Error messages that can appear during start-up ........................................... 7-11
CPU BOARD RAM-ERROR ................................................ 7-11
## Missing SW-module(s) detected. System STOP. ## .................... 7-12
## Imaging Procedure SW-modules in WRONG SLOTS. ##"; .................. 7-12
## APL /IEOS-module checksum error. System STOP.## .................... 7-13
## IMG1/IPS1-module checksum error. System STOP.## .................... 7-13
## IMG2/IPS2-module checksum error. System STOP.## .................... 7-13
## IMG3/IPS3-module checksum error. System STOP.## .................... 7-13
## SW-modules are not compatible. System STOP.## .................... 7-13
== MISSING CONFIGURATION ITEMS DETECTED .............................. 7-13
## N700: Motor Control Powers OFF: NO Movements ....................... 7-14
## N600: IMC A/D B-ch test failed: .................................. 7-16
## N100: CU1 SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx ........................ 7-16
## N900:CU2 SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx ......................... 7-17
## N1400: THC SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx ....................... 7-17
## N1200: CHC SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx ....................... 7-18
## N1200: CASSETTE HEAD BOARD ADC B-ch test failed: ................... 7-18
## N1700: CEPHALO feedback test error" ............................... 7-19
## N600: CHIN REST in WRONG position ................................. 7-19
-- Exposure button signal ON: ....................................... 7-20
-- Return button signal ON: ......................................... 7-20

Doc. code 8200629 7-i


Contents 7. Trouble Shooting

Problems during use ....................................................................................... 7-21


Information and error messages .................................................................... 7-21
Information and error message numbers ....................................................... 7-22
Description of information and error messages ............................................. 7-23
ERR62 HARDWARE FAILURE 1....N ....................................... 7-23
ERR63 MAIN SUPPLY VOLTAGE TOO LOW ................................... 7-23
ERR64 N900 SPI COMMUNICATION FAILURE ................................. 7-23
ERR65 GENERATOR FAILURE: kV ......................................... 7-23
ERR66 GENERATOR FAILURE: mA ......................................... 7-24
ERR67 GENERATOR FAILURE: TIME ....................................... 7-24
INF68 EXPOSURE INTERRUPTED - Press RETURN ............................ 7-24
ERR69 MCOK: Stepper Motor Cntr FAILURE ............................... 7-24
ERR70 FEEDBACK FAILURE: kV HIGH ..................................... 7-25
ERR71 FEEDBACK FAILURE: mA .......................................... 7-25
INF72 TUBE HOT: Wait for cooling... .................................. 7-25
INF74 GENERATOR TIME-OUT control - Press C ........................... 7-26
INF88 WAIT! Saving system data into memory ........................... 7-26
INF109 Press RETURN-button or E-key .................................. 7-26
INF120 Program not identified ....................................... 7-27
INF121 Access denied ............................................... 7-27
INF122 Enter password and press E ................................... 7-27
INF123 SERVICE STATE - Select next procedure ......................... 7-28
INF125 Remove cassette (Pan/ceph units only) ......................... 7-28
INF126 Insert cassette ............................................. 7-28
INF128 Key in program number and press E ............................. 7-29
INF132 Program parameters not installed .............................. 7-29
INF134 Increase kilovolt setting .................................... 7-30
INF135 Decrease kilovolt setting .................................... 7-30
INF136 Use faster film/screen or increase kV ......................... 7-30
INF137 Use slower film/screen or decrease kV ......................... 7-30
INF138 Valid exp. setting cannot be found ............................ 7-31
INF139 No cuts placed .............................................. 7-31
INF140 Select procedure ............................................ 7-31
INF141 Select program or exposure time ............................... 7-32
INF142 Select exposure time ......................................... 7-32
INF143 Select program .............................................. 7-32
INF144 Select number of radiograms .................................. 7-33
INF145 Select jaw .................................................. 7-33
INF146 Select side ................................................. 7-33
INF147 Select layer thickness (LT), 2/4 mm ........................... 7-34
INF148 Select interjoint distance ................................... 7-34
INF149 Select angle ................................................ 7-34
INF150 Select region and cuts, then press E .......................... 7-35
INF151 Select scanogram region and press E ........................... 7-35

7 - ii Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting Con-
tents
INF152 Select tomogram type ......................................... 7-35
INF153 Select tomogram subtype ...................................... 7-36
INF154 Press E to accept ........................................... 7-36
INF157 Adjust sensitivity number (SN) ................................ 7-36
INF158 Insert cassette to be calibrated .............................. 7-37
INF159 Select maintenance program (4 digits) ......................... 7-37
INF168 Use aperture 3 or faster film/screen .......................... 7-37
INF169 Use aperture 4 or slower film/screen .......................... 7-37
INF251 EXPOSURE .................................................... 7-38
INF252 Patient size and kV OK? READY... .............................. 7-38
INF253 Exposure time and kV OK? READY... ............................. 7-38
INF254 READY... .................................................... 7-38
INF339 Cassette 1 SN 000 ........................................... 7-39
INF340 Cassette 2 SN 000 ........................................... 7-39
INF341 Cassette 3 SN 000 ........................................... 7-39
INF343 Set chin-rest to upper position ............................... 7-39
INF344 Set chin-rest to lower position ............................... 7-39
INF354 Select aperture number 2 ..................................... 7-40
INF355 Select aperture number 1 ..................................... 7-40
INF356 Select aperture number 5 ..................................... 7-40
INF357 Select aperture number 6 ..................................... 7-40
INF358 Select aperture number 7 ..................................... 7-40
INF359 Select aperture number 8 ..................................... 7-40
INF360 Select aperture number 3 ..................................... 7-40
INF354 Select aperture number 2 ..................................... 7-40
INF362 Wait (The message flashes) ................................... 7-41
INF363 RETURNING....wait ........................................... 7-41
INF364 RETURN time-out error—PRESS RETURN ............................ 7-42
INF368 Remove Ceph soft tissue filter ................................ 7-43
INF371 Set cassette head to side position ............................ 7-44
INF372 Set cassette head to normal position .......................... 7-44
INF374 Close mirror ................................................ 7-44
INF376 Close cassette shields ....................................... 7-45
INF377 Open cassette shields ........................................ 7-45
INF379 Remove cephalo cassette ...................................... 7-45
INF380 Insert cephalo cassette 8AV .................................. 7-46
INF381 Insert cephalo cassette 8AH .................................. 7-46
INF382 Insert cephalo cassette 8SV .................................. 7-46
INF383 Insert cephalo cassette 18AV .................................. 7-46
INF384 Insert cephalo cassette 18AH .................................. 7-46
INF385 Insert cephalo cassette 18SV .................................. 7-46
INF386 Insert cephalo cassette 24AV .................................. 7-46
INF387 Insert cephalo cassette 24SV .................................. 7-46
INF388 Insert cephalo cassette 24AH .................................. 7-46
INF412 KV-FEEDBACK LOW ............................................. 7-46

Doc. code 8200629 7 - iii


Contents 7. Trouble Shooting

Other problems that may occur during use .................................................. 7-47


The soft tissue LEDs do not function. ............................................................ 7-47
Patient positioning/exposure lights do not function. ........................................ 7-47
The unit will not move when the up/down keys are pressed. ......................... 7-48
Blown fuses ..................................................................................................... 7-49
Fuse guide ..................................................................................................... 7-49
Fuse F1 on N2000 ......................................................................................... 7-50
Fuse F1 on N200 ........................................................................................... 7-51
Fuse F2 on N200 ........................................................................................... 7-55
Fuse F3 on N200 ........................................................................................... 7-59
Fuse F4 on N200 ........................................................................................... 7-61
Fuse F5 on N200 ........................................................................................... 7-63
Fuse F6 on N200 ........................................................................................... 7-65
Fuse F1 on N1000 ......................................................................................... 7-66
Generator problems ........................................................................................ 7-67
Generator Test Program ............................................................................... 7-67
Running the generator test program .............................................................. 7-67
Generator error codes .................................................................................. 7-69
GE1 "KVFBM error. xxV detected, 0V expected." ......................... 7-70
GE2 "MAFBM error. xxV detected, 1.6V expected." ....................... 7-72
GE3 "Net voltage is not ok." ........................................ 7-73
GE4 "Tube voltage is not ok." ....................................... 7-73
GE5 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected." ................ 7-73
GE6 "Net voltage is not ok." ........................................ 7-80
GE7 "No tube current." ............................................. 7-81
GE8 "Too much tube current." ........................................ 7-90
GE9 "KVFAIL error. Tube voltage is not ok." .......................... 7-97
GE10 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected." ............... 7-97
GE11 "Net voltage is not ok." ....................................... 7-97
GE12 "Tube current is not ok." ...................................... 7-98
GE13 "Tube voltage is not ok." ...................................... 7-99
GE14 "Net voltage is not ok." ....................................... 7-99
GE15 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected." ............... 7-99
GE16 "Tube current error. xxmA measured, xxmA expected." ............... 7-99
GE17 "Net voltage is not ok." ....................................... 7-99
GE18 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected." ............... 7-99
GE19 "Tube current error. xxmA measured, xxmA expected." ............... 7-99

7 - iv Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

Warnings and precautions


Warning - X-rays
When checking and testing the operation of the unit
always protect yourself from radiation generated by the
X-ray tube.

Warning - Electric shock


Switch the unit off and isolate it from the main power
supply before handling or replacing any of the circuit
boards in the unit.

Warning - High voltage


Before handling or replacing the N1000 and N200
boards switch the unit off, isolate it from the main power
supply and wait 10 minutes for the capacitors on theses
boards to discharge.

Caution - Static discharge


Always take adequate precautions when handling circuit
boards to prevent static discharge. Leave all new or
replacement circuit boards in their protective packaging
until the boards are needed. When handling the boards
hold them by their edges and do not touch any connec-
tors or components. Static discharge can destroy board
components.

Doc. code 8200629 7-1


7. Trouble Shooting

Trouble shooting principles


Circuit boards
Circuit boards cannot be repaired in the field. If a board
is found to be faulty the quickest way to get the unit
working is to replace the faulty board with a new one or
one that is known to be working correctly.
Faulty boards will be replaced free of charge if the unit
is under guarantee. For units not under guarantee, faulty
boards can be returned to SOREDEX for repair or
replacement.
When returning boards to SOREDEX please make sure
that you use the SOREDEX Return Authorization Proce-
dure.

Indicator LEDs
On most of the circuit boards there are indicator LEDs:
- Green LEDs indicate whether a board is receiving
the supply voltage. When the unit is switched on all
the green LEDs must come on.
- Yellow function LEDs will switch on of off depending
on the state of the signal (high/low).
- Yellow SPI LEDs flash when there is SPI communi-
cation activity.

7 -2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

A list of boards and their voltage indicating LEDs (green)


is given below.

Voltage +5V (+9V) +15V (+19V) -15V (-19V) *28V


Board
N100 D9, D10, D5 D4, D11 D3, D12 D1, D8
N200 D11 D13 D12 D14, D24, D25, D26
N300 D1 D15 - D16
N600 D8 - - -
N700 D15, D2 D10 - D12
N800 D18 D14 - D12
N900 D24 D23, D13 D22 -
N1000 D16 D15 - D14
N1100 D6 D5 - -
N1200 D16 - - -
N1400 D31 D14 D13 -
N1600 D1, D8 D5 - -
N1700 D2 - - -

Test pins
On most of the circuit boards there are test pins that
allow the board to be checked to see if it is functioning
correctly. These are also described in the section "Cir-
cuit boards".
When checking voltages a digital multimeter (DMM)
must be used.

Doc. code 8200629 7-3


7. Trouble Shooting

Check cables
The instruction "check cables" appears in the trouble
shooting instructions. The procedure for checking the
cables is as follows:
1. Make sure that the connectors on the cables are
correctly plugged in to their respective connectors on
the circuit boards. The connectors must be squarely
positioned and must not be loose or crooked. If the
connector has a locking mechanism make sure that it
is locked.
If the connector looks out of position, remove the
connector, check the pins (see 2, below). If the pins
are okay reconnect the connector.
2. Disconnect the connectors from the boards and
make sure that there are no bent, broken or missing
pins. If there is damage that can be easily repaired,
for example straighten a pin, repair the damage and
reconnect the connector. If the damage cannot be
repaired replace the cable.
3. Visually check the cable for cuts, wear, damaged
insulation and kinks. If there is obvious mechanical
damage to the cable it must be replaced. If there is
no obvious mechanical damage use a digital
multimeter (DMM) to check the resistance of the
different wires within the cable. An undamaged wire
will have no resistance (0 ohm), a damaged wire will
have a resistance value.

7 -4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

Image quality
Bad quality images can be due to a badly aligned unit,
the film processing system or incorrect patient position-
ing. If a user complains about the quality of the images
first check that the user is positioning the patient cor-
rectly.
For information on how to position the patient refer to
the Tome User's Manual.

If patient positioning is correct, make sure that the film


processing system is working correctly and that the
processing chemicals are fresh. If the film processing is
correct but the problem of bad quality image persists the
alignment of the unit should be checked.
For information on how to align the unit refer to the
Tome installation manual.

Doc. code 8200629 7-5


7. Trouble Shooting

Power supply problems

Power supply problem

Check the on/off


switch light. If the main fuse has blown or there is no mains
power supply you will not hear the cooling fan.

Check main
The light is on No fuse F1 on Fuse OK No Replace fuse.
N2000

Yes Yes
Fuse keeps
blowing. See
Check LED Check mains section "Blown
D57 on N200. power supply. fuses"

Check fuse F7
LED is on. No Fuse OK No Replace fuse
on N200

Yes
Fuse keeps
Yes Check cable blowing. See
between N2000 section "Blown
and N200 fuses"

Check LEDS D11,


D12, D13, D14,
D24, D25 and D26
Replace N200 Yes Cable OK No Replace cable
on N200

Check fuses
All LEDs (F1-F6) on All fuses Replace blown
No No
are on. N200 for LEDs are OK fuses
that are not on.

Yes Yes
Fuse keeps
blowing. See
Main power supply OK. Replace N200. section "Blown
fuses"

Refer to "Display problems

7 -6 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

Display problems
If the display remains blank when the unit is switched on
it is either because the unit is not receiving power or
because there is a problem with the display.

Display blank 1(4)

Check LEDs D1-D5 and


D9-D12 on N100.

Check power supply.


All LEDs
No See section- Power OK.
are on.
"Power supply problems"

Yes Yes

Check LED D8 Check cable


(+5V) on N600. between N200
and N100.

LED is on. No Replace cable. No Cable OK.

Yes Yes

Check voltage at Replace N100.


Replace N600.
R6 on N600.

Voltage
No
is +19V.

Yes

Check LED D5 and D6

2 (4)

Doc. code 8200629 7-7


7. Trouble Shooting

2 (4) Display blank

One or
both of the LEDs Yes
are on.

No Check that memory


modules RAM,
Check LED D7 on BOOT, APL,
All installed No Install them
N600. IMG1, IMG2 are
correctly installed
in N600
Yes

Replace N600
LED is on No

Yes

Check voltage
at TP1 on N600

Voltage is
No Replace N600
+9V (EL+9V).

Yes

Check voltage
at TP2 on N600

Voltage is
No Replace N600
+19V (EL19V).

Yes

3 (4)

7 -8 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

3 (4) Display blank

Yes

LED/LEDs on. Yes

No Check that memory


modules RAM,
Check LED D7 on BOOT, APL,
All installed No Install them
N600. IMG1, IMG2 are
correctly installed
in N600
Yes

Replace N600
LED is on No

Yes

Check voltage
at TP1 on N600

Voltage is
No Replace N600
+9V (EL+9V).

Yes

Check voltage
at TP2 on N600

Voltage is
No Replace N600
+19V (EL19V).

4 (4)

Doc. code 8200629 7-9


7. Trouble Shooting

4 (4) Display blank

Yes

Check LED D5
(EL+5V) on N1600.

Check cable
LED is on No between N600 and Cable OK No Replace cable
N1600

Yes Yes

Check LED D8 Replace N1600


(EL+5V) on N1600.

Check cable
LED is on No between N600 and Cable OK No Replace cable
N1600

Yes Yes

Check cable signals Replace N1600


VDAT, VCLK, HS
and VS between
N600 and N1600.

Signals OK No Replace N1600

7 -10 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

Problems during start-up


The unit selftest
When the unit is switched on it carries out a selftest.
During the test the software, the SPI communication and
some circuit boards are tested.
If the unit is functioning correctly software version infor-
mation, shown below, will appear briefly on the display.

==============================================

== Imaging Elements Oper. System : AP970101 ==

== Imaging Procedure Software #1 : IA970101 ==

== Imaging Procedure Software #2 : IB970101 ==

== Imaging Procedure Software #3 : IC970101 ==

== Misc. B-Mem Data and Software : MS970101 ==

== XRAY TUBE ID : 1 ==
=================================

After this the user's display will appear. Refer to user's


manual for more information about the user's display

If the unit does not pass the selftest, an error message


will appear on the display.

Error messages that can appear during start-up


CPU BOARD RAM-ERROR
Meaning:
The RAM memory module (N650) on N600 is not func-
tioning.

Corrective action:
Check that RAM memory module is correctly installed.
If it is, replace N650.

If the message reappears after N650 has been re-


placed,
replace N600.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 11


7. Trouble Shooting

## Missing SW-module(s) detected. System STOP. ##


Meaning:
The self test fails because one or more of the software
modules, N650s and N660s that are connected to N600
have not been detected.
The word "missing" will appear next to the module or modules
that are not detected.
==============================================

== Imaging Elements Oper. System : AP970101 ==

== Imaging Procedure Software #1 : IA970101 ==

== Imaging Procedure Software #2 : missing ==

== Imaging Procedure Software #3 : missing ==

== Misc. B-Mem Data and Software : MS970101 ==

== XRAY TUBE ID : 1 ==
====================================

Corrective action:
Check that the modules are installed and inserted cor-
rectly. If modules are installed and inserted correctly and
the message reappears when the unit is switched on
again, replace appropriate module or modules.

## Imaging Procedure SW-modules in WRONG SLOTS. ##";

.. Validating SW-modules. Please wait...


Meaning:
The memory chips on memory modules are not in their
correct places.

Corrective action:
Switch the unit off.
Remove the memory modules and put the memory chips
in their correct positions.

7 -12 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

## APL /IEOS-module checksum error. System STOP.##


or
## IMG1/IPS1-module checksum error. System STOP.##
or
## IMG2/IPS2-module checksum error. System STOP.##
or
## IMG3/IPS3-module checksum error. System STOP.##
Meaning:
The software has been corrupted.

Corrective action:
Replace the appropriate software module or download
new software using a PC. See section "Upgrading the
software using a PC".

## SW-modules are not compatible. System STOP.##


Meaning:
The software modules installed are not compatible and
cannot work together.

Corrective action:
Replace the appropriate software module or download
new software using a PC. See section "Upgrading the
software using a PC".

== MISSING CONFIGURATION ITEMS DETECTED

-- Menu Setting NOT Saved

Press any menu key


Meaning:
A unit setting was changed, for example the time, but
the setting was not saved in the memory before the unit
was switched off.

Corrective action:
Change the setting again and save it in the memory
before switching the unit off. For information on how to
save settings in the memory see the section "Service
Codes".

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 13


7. Trouble Shooting

## N700: Motor Control Powers OFF: NO Movements


Meaning:
None of the stepper motors are receiving power. The
display will function, but the unit cannot be used to take
exposure

Corrective action

##N700: Motor control Powers OFF: NO Movements 1(2)

Check LEDs D15


and D12 on N700.

Check power supply.


LEDs are on. No See section-
"Power supply problems"

Yes

Check LED D6
(MCRST*) on N600.

LED is on. Yes

No

Check MOTPOWON
Replace N600
IC9 pin 17 on N600.

Voltage
No
is +5V

Yes

2 (2)

7 -14 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

2 (2) #N700

Check TP 7
(MCRESET*) on N600.

Voltage
No
is +5V

Yes Check cable between


Cable OK. No Replace cable
N600 and N700.
Check LED D13
(MOTPOW) on N700. Yes

Replace N700

LED is on. No

Yes

Check LED D16


(LCASOK) on N700.

LED is on. No Replace N700

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 15


7. Trouble Shooting

## N600: IMC A/D B-ch test failed:


Meaning:
N600 is not working.

Corrective action
Replace N600.

## N100: CU1 SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx


Meaning
N600 cannot communicate with N100 (CU1). After this
message the self test continues normally but the expo-
sure button and all movements are disabled (the unit can
not be used to take exposures). Only the user interface
functions.

Corrective action
No power supply. Check to see if LED D5 on N100 is
on. If it is not refer to section "Power Supply Problems".

Check to see if N100 works.


- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connectors J104 and J114 from N100.
This will cut the SPI serial lines to all the boards
except N600 and N100.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears, check wiring between
N100 and N600.
- If wiring is OK, replace N100.
- If the same message appears after replacing N100,
replace N600.

7 -16 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

## N900:CU2 SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx


Meaning
N600 can not communicate correctly with N900.
After this message the self test continues normally but
the exposure button and all movements are disabled (the
unit can not be used to take exposures). Only the user
interface functions.

Corrective action
No power supply. Check to see if LED D24 on N900 is
on. If it is not refer to the section "Power Supply Prob-
lems" at the beginning of Trouble Shooting.

Check to see if N900 works.


- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connectors J904 and J905 from N900
and J114 from N100. This cuts the SPI serial lines to
N1200, N1100 and N1700.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears, check the wiring be-
tween N100 and N900.
- If the wiring is OK replace N900.

## N1400: THC SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx


Meaning
N600 can not communicate correctly with N1400.
After this message the self test continues normally but
the exposure button and all movements are disabled (the
unit can not be used to take exposures). Only the user
interface functions.

Corrective action
No power supply. Check to see if LED D31 on N1400 is
on. If it is not refer to section "Power Supply Problems".

Check to see if N1400 works.


- Switch power off.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 17


7. Trouble Shooting

- Disconnect connector J905 from N900 and J114


from N100. This cuts the SPI serial lines to N1200
and to N1700.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears, check wiring between
N900 and N1100 and between N1100 and N1400.
- If wiring is OK, replace N1400.

## N1200: CHC SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx


Meaning
N600 can not communicate correctly with N1200.
After this message the self test continues normally but
the exposure button and all movements are disabled (the
unit can not be used to take exposures). Only the user
interface functions.

Corrective action
No power supply. Check to see if LED D16 on N1200 is
on. If it is not refer to section "Power Supply Problems".

Check to see if N1200 works.


- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connector J114 from N100. This cuts SPI
serial lines to N1700.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears, check wiring between
N900 and N1200.
- If wiring is OK, replace N1200.

## N1200: CASSETTE HEAD BOARD ADC B-ch test failed:


Meaning
N1200 is not functioning.

Corrective action
Replace N1200.

7 -18 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

## N1700: CEPHALO feedback test error"


Meaning
1. Feedback error.
2. Wrong configuration. A panoramic unit has been
configured to be a pan/ceph unit.

Corrective action
1. No power supply. Check to see if LED D2 on N1700
is on. If it is not refer to section "Power Supply
Problems".
Check to see if N1700 works.
- Switch power off.
- Check wiring between N100 and N1700.
- If wiring is OK, replace N1700.
2. Check the configuration of the unit and reconfigure if
necessary. Refer to service code 9700 - option 4 or
service code 9791.

## N600: CHIN REST in WRONG position


Meaning
Both chin rest position microswitches are closed. This
combination is not allowed.

Corrective action
Check to see if the microswitches work.
Use service code 9770 - H/W test menu, option #6
Sensor tests to see if they work. Also refer to INF 343/
344 later in Trouble Shooting.
If they do not work replace them.

Check to see if N600 works


- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connectors J608 and J609 from N600.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears replace N600.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 19


7. Trouble Shooting

-- Exposure button signal ON:


Meaning
The exposure button is active even though it is not
pressed down.

Corrective action
Check to see if the exposure switch is broken.
- Switch power off.
- Disconnect exposure switch from its connector.
- Switch the power on. If the message does not ap-
pear replace the exposure switch.

Check to see if N600 works.


- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connector J605 from N600.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears replace N600.

No power supply. Check to see if LED D18 on N800 is


on. If it is not refer to section "Power Supply Problems".

Check to see if N800 works.


If indicator LED D20 on N800 is on replace N800.

-- Return button signal ON:


Meaning
The return button is active even though it is not pressed
down.

Corrective action
Replace the return button.

7 -20 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

Problems during use


Information and error messages
Information and error messages appear on the user
display in the INFO line, for example:
Close mirror
Information messages appear as the unit is being used
and help the user to operate the unit. The information
messages are usually instructions telling the user what
to do next. If the user does not follow the instruction, the
user is not able to continue to operate the unit.

For example, if the message "Close mirror" appears on


the display the mirror must be closed before the user
can continue to operate the unit. When the mirror is
closed the message will clear from the display and the
user can continue to use the unit.
If the mirror is closed but the message remains on the
display it indicates either that the instruction has not
been correctly carried out, for example mirror has not
been properly closed, or the unit is malfunctioning.

An error message will appear if the system detects a


unit malfunction during operation. The unit cannot be
used if there is an error message on the display. You
can, however, enter the service mode to carry out serv-
ice tests and checks. Section 5 - Service Codes lists
and describes all the codes.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 21


7. Trouble shooting

Information and error message numbers


All information and error messages have a number. The
message number does not appear with the message on
the user display. The message number can only be seen
by entering the information mode. To enter the informa-
tion mode press the info ( i ) button at the top of the
display. The user display will disappear and the informa-
tion (prefix INF) or error (prefix ERR) message together
with its number will appear on the display.
INF374 Close mirror

ERR65 GENERATOR FAILURE: kV

To return to the user display press the exit (door) key at


the top of the display.

Note that although the messages may be in different


languages, depending on the set up of the unit, the
message numbers are the same for all language ver-
sions of the messages.

7 -22 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

Description of information and error messages


ERR62 HARDWARE FAILURE 1....N
Meaning:
The main processor on the N600 board cannot commu-
nicate with the slave processor on the N900 board.

Corrective action:
Switch the unit off, wait 10 seconds and then switch the
unit on again. If there is a hardware problem the follow-
ing message will appear on the display:
##N900 : CU2 SPI-com. Error status hex-word=xx
Refer to section "Start up problems" for more informa-
tion.

ERR63 MAIN SUPPLY VOLTAGE TOO LOW


Meaning:
The main power supply to the unit is too low and the unit
cannot operate.

Corrective action:
Check the main supply (line) voltage to the unit. It must
be within ±10% of the nominal value (230VAC or
115VAC). If the supply voltage is OK, use service code
9770, second page option 3 "Main power supply voltage
A/D test" to check the main power supply in the unit. If
the A/D value is zero N200 must be changed.

ERR64 N900 SPI COMMUNICATION FAILURE


Meaning:
The communication link (SPI) between N600 (the mas-
ter) and N900) the slave has failed.

Corrective action:
Use service code 9770, first page option 2 "Start self
test" to check the SPI communication. If N900 has failed
replace it.

ERR65 GENERATOR FAILURE: kV


Refer to the section "Generator problems".

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 23


7. Trouble shooting

ERR66 GENERATOR FAILURE: mA


Refer to the section "Generator problems".

ERR67 GENERATOR FAILURE: TIME


Refer to the section "Generator problems".

INF68 EXPOSURE INTERRUPTED - Press RETURN


Meaning:
The exposure button was released (or detected to have
been released) during an exposure. The RETURN button
or E-key must be pressed to drive the unit back to the
PIO position.
Note that the exposure button MUST be pressed and
HELD DOWN for the duration of the exposure.

Problem and corrective action:


The message appears while the exposure button is
being held down.
- Exposure button switch is broken or there is a faulty
connection in the button switch. Check button switch.
If faulty replace it.
- The spiral cable to which the exposure button is
attached is damaged. Check cable and connector. If
either are damaged replace the cable.
- Exposure key lock is malfunctioning.
- N800 is faulty.

ERR69 MCOK: Stepper Motor Cntr FAILURE


Meaning:
The stepper motor controller (N700) cannot drive the
stepper motors

Corrective action:
Switch the power off and wait ten seconds. If the mes-
sage reappears, refer to the message "##N700: Motor
Control Powers OFF: NO Movements" in the section
"Problems during startup"

7 -24 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

ERR70 FEEDBACK FAILURE: kV HIGH


Meaning:
The kV feedback value during an exposure was too high.

Problem and corrective action:


Check fuse F3 on N200. If the fuse is OK refer to the
section "Generator problems".

ERR71 FEEDBACK FAILURE: mA


Meaning:
The mA feedback value during an exposure was incor-
rect.

Problem and corrective action:


Refer to "Generator problems" section

INF72 TUBE HOT: Wait for cooling...


Meaning:
The tube head is cooling down after an exposure. The
message will automatically clear when the tube head is
cool.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
The temperature sensor in the tubehead has failed.
Switch the power off.
Disconnect the cable connected to J1402 from N1400
(THC).
Measure the resistance across pins 1 and 2 of the
cable.
When the tube head is hot (over 70°C) the resistance
should be infinity. When the tube head is cool (normal
room temperature) the resistance should be about 0.
If the resistances are not these values replace the tube

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 25


7. Trouble shooting

head. If the resistances are correct check wiring (signal


TUBEHOT) between N1400 (THC) and N1100 (HVC)
and between N1100 (HVC) and N900 (CU2).

INF74 GENERATOR TIME-OUT control - Press C


Meaning:
Exposure has lasted too long and a hardware failure has
occurred in the generator control circuit.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Control panel not functioning.
Check the key function using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF88 WAIT! Saving system data into memory


Meaning:
Will appear briefly, two seconds (maximum time two
minutes) when exposure information is stored in the unit
memory. The message will automatically clear after the
data is saved

INF109 Press RETURN-button or E-key


Meaning:
Either the RETURN button or the E-key must be pressed
to drive the unit to the PIO position.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
The RETURN button does not work.
The RETURN button (on the side of the cassette car-
riage) is connected to N1200.
Switch the power off.
Disconnect the cable connected to J1210 from N1200.
Measure the resistance across pins 1 and 2 of the
cable. The resistance should be about 0 when the RE-
TURN button is pressed and infinite when it is not
pressed. If these resistance values are correct replace
N1200. If the values are wrong replace the RETURN
button.

The E-keys do not work.


Control panel not functioning. Check the key function
using service code 9770, page two, option 1 - Key-code
testing. If the keys do not work replace N1600.

7 -26 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

INF120 Program not identified


Meaning:
A program or service code number was keyed in that is
not recognised by the system.
Press any key to clear the message.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Control panel not functioning.
Check the key function using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

Problem and corrective action if the message keeps


reappearing:
Select correct program number.

INF121 Access denied


Meaning:
The wrong password was keyed in when entering the
service mode.
Press any key to clear the message. (Message INF122
will reappear)

Corrective action:
Key in correct password.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Control panel not functioning.
Check the key function using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF122 Enter password and press E


Meaning:
This message is a request for the password that must
be keyed in to enter the service mode. Note if the wrong
password is keyed in message INF121 will appear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Control panel not functioning.
Check the key function using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 27


7. Trouble shooting

INF123 SERVICE STATE - Select next procedure


Meaning:
Appears after you have keyed in you password but
before you have pressed the E key (INF122). The mes-
sage will clear when you press the E key.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Control panel not functioning.
Check the key function using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 "Key-code testing". If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF125 Remove cassette (Pan/ceph units only)


Meaning:
This message will appear if the unit is in the ceph posi-
tion and the panoramic cassette has not been removed
from the cassette carriage.
Remove the cassette and the message will clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
The Cassette Type Sensor (N2400) is not working.
Check the sensor operation using service code 9770,
option 6 - Sensor tests. If the sensor is not working,
replace it.

If the sensor is working there may be a problem with the


sensor power to the optosensor. Select service code
9770, page two, option 2 - Power signals to all
optosensors. To check the sensor, measure the sensor
power at TPI on N900. The voltage must be 5VDC. If it
is not 5VDC, replace N900. If it is 5VDC replace the
sensor board.

INF126 Insert cassette


Meaning:
The panoramic cassette must be inserted into the cas-
sette carriage before an exposure can be taken. Mes-
sage clears when a correctly labelled cassette is in-
serted into the cassette carriage. Refer to the user’s
manual for information on how to label cassettes.

7 -28 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
1. Cassette not labelled or the label is missing.
- Label cassette.
2. Label in wrong position.
- Reposition label.
3. Label dirty.
- Clean or replace label.
4. Cassette upside down, back to front or not fully
inserted.
- Insert the cassette correctly. Refer to user’s
manual.

The Cassette Type Sensor (N2400) is not working.


Refer to INF125 for information on what to do.

INF128 Key in program number and press E


Meaning:
After you press the C key (once for exposure program
selection and twice for service codes) the number of the
exposure program (three digits) or service code (four
digits) must be keyed in.

What to do if the message does not clear:


E key not functioning. Check the key functions using
service code 9770, page two, option 1 - Key-code
testing. If the keys do not work replace N1600.

INF132 Program parameters not installed


Meaning:
Indicates that the exposure program selected has not
been installed in the unit.
For example, if you select a ceph program when there is
no ceph unit installed.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not functioning.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 29


7. Trouble shooting

INF134 Increase kilovolt setting

INF135 Decrease kilovolt setting


Meaning:
Indicates that the kV value is too low/high for the patient
size selected, and a higher/lower kV value must be
selected.
Select a kV value within the recommended range, the
dotted area on the display, and the message will clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
You selected another kV value that is outside the recom-
mended range
Select kV within recommended range.

Keys not functioning


Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF136 Use faster film/screen or increase kV

INF137 Use slower film/screen or decrease kV


Meaning:
The film/screen combination (cassette) or the kV value
are not correct for the patient size selected and a differ-
ent film/screen combination or kV must be used.

Problem and corrective action:


Message does not clear after inserting new cassette.
Refer to INF126 Insert cassette

Message does not clear after a new kV value was


keyed in.
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

7 -30 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

INF138 Valid exp. setting cannot be found


Meaning:
It indicates that the kV value is not within the accepted
range.
The message will clear when a kV value within the ac-
cepted range is selected. For more information on kV
selection refer to the user’s manual.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF139 No cuts placed


Meaning:
Indicates that no tomo cuts were selected during the
dental tomo program.
The message will clear when the cuts are selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF140 Select procedure


Meaning:
The exposure procedure has not been selected.
The message will clear when the procedure is selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 31


7. Trouble shooting

INF141 Select program or exposure time


Meaning:
The exposure program or exposure time must be se-
lected.
The message will clear when the program or exposure
time is selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF142 Select exposure time


Meaning:
The exposure time for a ceph exposure must be se-
lected.
The message will clear when the time is selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF143 Select program


Meaning:
The exposure program must be selected.
The message will clear when the program is selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

7 -32 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

INF144 Select number of radiograms


Meaning:
The number of images that will appear on the film must
be selected.
The message will clear when the number of radiograms
is selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF145 Select jaw


Meaning:
The jaw that you wish to take an exposure of must be
selected.
The message will clear when the jaw is selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF146 Select side


Meaning:
The side of the jaw that you wish to take an exposure of
must be selected.
The message will clear when the side is selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 33


7. Trouble shooting

INF147 Select layer thickness (LT), 2/4 mm


Meaning:
The layer thickness for a dental tomo exposure must be
selected.
The message will clear when the layer thickness is
selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF148 Select interjoint distance


Meaning:
The interjoint distance for a TMJ Tome exposure must
be selected.
The message will clear when the interjoint distance is
selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF149 Select angle


Meaning:
The angle for a TMJ Tome exposure must be selected.
The message will clear when the angle is selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

7 -34 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

INF150 Select region and cuts, then press E


Meaning:
The region and number of cuts for a TMJ Tome expo-
sure must be selected.
The message will clear when the region and cuts are
selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF151 Select scanogram region and press E


Meaning:
The scanogram region you wish to take an exposure of
must be selected.
The message will clear when the region is selected and
the E key pressed.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF152 Select tomogram type


Meaning:
The tomogram type you require must be selected.
The message will clear when the tomograph type is
selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 35


7. Trouble shooting

INF153 Select tomogram subtype


Meaning:
The tomogram subtype you require must be selected.
The message will clear when the subtype is selected.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF154 Press E to accept


Meaning:
The E key must be pressed to accept the option chosen.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF157 Adjust sensitivity number (SN)


Meaning:
Select the film/screen sensitivity number during the
calibration program.
When a number is selected the message will clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

7 -36 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

INF158 Insert cassette to be calibrated


Meaning:
The panoramic cassette to be calibrated must be in-
serted into the cassette carriage.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Refer to message INF126 for information on what to do.

INF159 Select maintenance program (4 digits)


Meaning:
A four digit number must be keyed in to select a mainte-
nance program.
When the number is keyed in the message will clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Keys not working.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.

INF168 Use aperture 3 or faster film/screen

INF169 Use aperture 4 or slower film/screen


Meaning:
A different aperture or a faster film/screen combination
must be used.
When the new aperture or faster film/screen is selected
the message will clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
New aperture selected but the message remains on the
display.
Refer to INF354 for information on what to do.

Different cassette inserted.


Make sure that a faster cassette was used.
If message still does not clear refer to INF126 Insert
cassette, for more information on what to do.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 37


7. Trouble shooting

INF251 EXPOSURE
Meaning
Appears then the exposure button is pressed down to
take an exposure.
The message will always clear.
If you remove your finger from the exposure button
during an exposure message INF68 EXPOSURE INTER-
RUPTED - Press RETURN will appear.

INF252 Patient size and kV OK? READY...

INF253 Exposure time and kV OK? READY...

INF254 READY...
Meaning:
The unit is ready to take an exposure.
When you press the exposure button message INF251
EXPOSURE will appear on the display.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Exposure button not working.
- Exposure button switch is broken or there is a faulty
connection in the button switch. Check button switch.
If faulty replace it.
- The spiral cable to which the exposure button is
attached is damaged. Check cable and connector. If
damaged replace the cable.

Exposure key lock is malfunctioning.

7 -38 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

INF339 Cassette 1 SN 000

INF340 Cassette 2 SN 000

INF341 Cassette 3 SN 000


Meaning:
The messages appears briefly on the display when a
panoramic cassette is inserted, and indicates the cas-
sette number and the film/screen sensitivity number.

Checking the cassette identification:


If you wish to check the cassette identification, use
service code 9770, page 2 option 4 "PAN identification
test"

INF343 Set chin-rest to upper position

INF344 Set chin-rest to lower position


Meaning:
The chin-rest is in the wrong position and must be
moved.
When the chin-rest is in the correct position the mes-
sage will clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Microswitches not activated:
Move the chin-rest mechanism up and down to see if it
activates the position microswitches. If not adjust the
position of the microswitches until it does.

Microswitches broken.
If the chin-rest mechanism activates the microswitches
but the message does not disappear the microswitches
may be broken. Check the sensor operation using serv-
ice code 9770, option 6 - Sensor tests. If the
microswitches are not working, replace the faulty one.
If the message still does not disappear after the
microswitche/s have been replaced, replace N600.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 39


7. Trouble shooting

INF354 Select aperture number 2

INF355 Select aperture number 1

INF356 Select aperture number 5

INF357 Select aperture number 6

INF358 Select aperture number 7

INF359 Select aperture number 8

INF360 Select aperture number 3

INF354 Select aperture number 2

Meaning:
The correct aperture must be selected.
When the correct aperture is selected the message will
clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
The positioning rail on the primary aperture assembly
has moved.
To check, slightly move the aperture selector knob in
one direction and then the other. If the message disap-
pears the positioning rail is incorrectly positioned. Repo-
sition the rail by loosening the holding screws and mov-
ing the rail slightly to the left or right until the message
clears. Tighten the screws when the adjustment is cor-
rect.

No sensor power.
There may be a problem with the sensor power to
N1400. Select service code 9770, page two, option 2 -
Power signals to all optosensors. Measure the voltage
at TP1 on N900. The voltage must be 5VDC. If it is not
5VDC, replace N900. If it is 5VDC replace N1400.

Sensor not functioning.


Check the sensor operation using service code 9770,
option 6 - sensor tests. If the optosensors are not work-
ing, replace N1400.

7 -40 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

INF362 Wait (The message flashes)


Meaning:
The tubehead is cooling down after an exposure.
The message will always clear. Note that the maximum
cooling period is five minutes.

INF363 RETURNING....wait
Meaning:
Appears after the RETURN button or E-key has been
pressed and indicates that the unit is moving back to the
PIO position.
The RETURN sequence is as follows:
1. V movement, the C-arm returns to the horizontal
position
2. X and Y movements together, the C-arm moves to
the correct X and Y PIO positions
3. R and C movements together, the C-arm rotates to
the PIO position the cassette carriage returns to the
start position.
NOTE
If the unit does not return to one of the PIO positions
within a fixed time period the message INF364 "RE-
TURN time-out error—PRESS RETURN" will appear.
Also note that if the unit does not return to one PIO
position it will not attempt to return to the next one.
For example, if the unit starts to return to the X and Y
positions, but does not reach them before timeout, the
unit will not attempt to return to the R and C positions.

Problems and corrective actions if the unit does not


return to the PIO position:
No or limited movement.
One or more of the stepper motors have failed, or one
of the R-motor belts has broken.
Test the operation of the motors with the service codes.
9960 tests the X movement
9961 tests the Y movement
9962 tests the R movement
9963 tests the V movement
9964 tests the C movement

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 41


7. Trouble shooting

If any of the motors do not operate, replace them. If the


R motor functions correctly but C-arm does not rotate,
check to see if the any of the R-motor belts have bro-
ken. If they have replace them.

Sensors not functioning


The unit moves but one or more of the movements
cannot find a stop position.
One or more of the sensors has failed.
Check the sensor operation using service code 9770,
option 6 - sensor tests. If any of the optosensor boards
are not working, replace them.

No sensor power.
If the optosensors are working there may be a problem
with the sensor power to the optosensors. Select serv-
ice code 9770, page two, option 2 - Power signals to all
optosensors.

To check the X movement sensor board (N2500) meas-


ure the voltage at J10, pin 1, on N100. For the Y move-
ment sensor board (N2500) measure the voltage at J11,
pin 1, on N100.
The voltage must be 5VDC. If it is not 5VDC replace
N100. If it is 5VDC replace the sensor board.

To check the R (N2300), V (N2600) and C (N2500)


movement sensors, measure the sensor power at TP1
on N900. The voltage must be 5VDC. If it is not 5VDC,
replace N900. If it is 5VDC replace the corresponding
sensor board.

INF364 RETURN time-out error—PRESS RETURN


Meaning:
Appears after the RETURN button or E-key have been
pressed if the PIO position is not found within a fixed
time period.

What to if the message if the message reappears.


Refer to message INF363 "RETURNING....wait".

7 -42 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

INF368 Remove Ceph soft tissue filter


Meaning:
The unit is in the pan position and the ceph soft tissue
filter has not been removed.
Rotate the soft tissue filter knob until the message
clears - all the soft tissue LEDs on the ceph head sup-
port must go out.
For information on how to use the soft tissue filter refer
to the ceph section in the User’s Manual.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
The potentiometer at the end of the soft tissue filter
mechanism, in front of the tube head, is not working.
Use service code 9700 option 4 "Ceph setup/test menu",
second level option 4 Read Ceph filter A/D-values" (or
9791 option 4) to check the operation of the
potentiometer. If the potentiometer is broken replace it.

No power signal.
If the potentiometer is working the problem is with the
signal to N600. The filter position signal passes through
N1400, N1100 and N900, where it is converted in to SPI
communication. If the signal is zero at any board, the
board is faulty and must be replaced.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 43


7. Trouble shooting

INF371 Set cassette head to side position

INF372 Set cassette head to normal position


Meaning:
The cassette head is in the wrong position for the expo-
sure to be taken. When it is moved to the correct posi-
tion, the message will clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
The cassette head microswitches have failed.
Check the sensor operation using service code 9770,
option 6 - sensor tests. If one or more of the
microswitches are not working, replace the faulty one.

If the message still does not disappear after the


microswitche/s have been replaced, replace N600.

INF374 Close mirror


Meaning:
The mirror was opened so that the patient could be
positioned, and must be closed before an exposure can
be taken. When the mirror is closed the message will
clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
The mirror position microswitch has failed.
Check the sensor operation using service code 9770,
option 6 - sensor tests. If the microswitch is not working,
replace it.

If the message still does not disappear after the


microswitch have been replaced, replace N600.

7 -44 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

INF376 Close cassette shields

INF377 Open cassette shields


Meaning:
The cassette shields are in the wrong position for the
exposure to be taken. When the cassette shields are
moved to the correct position, the message will clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
The cassette shield microswitches have failed.
Check the sensor operation using service code 9770,
option 6 - sensor tests. If the microswitches are not
working, replace the faulty one.

If the message still does not disappear after the


microswitche/s have been replaced, replace N600.

INF379 Remove cephalo cassette


Meaning:
The ceph cassette must be removed when the unit is in
the pan position.
When the ceph cassette is removed the message will
clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
One or more of the cassette identification switches in
the ceph cassette holder has failed.
Check the microswitch operation using service code
9700, option 4 Ceph setup/test menu, second level
option 5 Test Ceph cassette switches. If the
microswitches are not working, replace the board,
N1900/1901/2200/2201.

No power signal.
If the microswitches are working there is a problem with
N1700 and it must be replaced.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 45


7. Trouble shooting

INF380 Insert cephalo cassette 8AV

INF381 Insert cephalo cassette 8AH

INF382 Insert cephalo cassette 8SV

INF383 Insert cephalo cassette 18AV

INF384 Insert cephalo cassette 18AH

INF385 Insert cephalo cassette 18SV

INF386 Insert cephalo cassette 24AV

INF387 Insert cephalo cassette 24SV

INF388 Insert cephalo cassette 24AH

Meaning:
A ceph cassette must be inserted into the ceph cassette
holder before a ceph exposure can be taken.
When a ceph cassette is inserted the message will
clear.

Problem and corrective action if the message does


not clear:
Refer to INF379 "Remove cephalo cassette".

INF412 KV-FEEDBACK LOW


Meaning:
No kV feedback from the tubehead.

Problem and corrective action:


Check fuse F4 on N200. If OK check cable from
tubehead to N1000 and the service switch. The cable
must be connected and the service switch on.
If OK refer to "Generator problems".

7 -46 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

Other problems that may occur during use


The soft tissue LEDs do not function.
Solution
Use service code 9700 option 4 "Ceph setup/test menu",
second level option 4 Read Ceph filter A/D-values" (or
9791 option 4) to see if the filter position signals are
correct (Refer to INF386). If the signals are correct use
service code 9700 option 6 "Test Ceph filter position
leds", third level option 8 - all LEDs.
If the LEDs do not work replace N1700.

Patient positioning/exposure lights do not function.


Solution
Use service code 9770 option 4 "Test lights" to test the
lights. Replace the lamps if they do not work.

If the lamps work using this service code but the expo-
sure warning light does not operate in normal use, the
control circuit on N300 is defective. Replace N300.

If the focal trough and TMJ (Y) lights do not operate in


normal use, the control circuit on N900 is defective.
Replace N900.

If the midsagittal (X) and Frankfort (Z) lights do not


operate in normal use, the control circuit on N700 is
defective. Replace N700.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 47


7. Trouble shooting

The unit will not move when the up/down keys are
pressed.
Solution
The control signals (SREF1/2) from the up/down keys
(there are up/down keyy on the keyboard and on the
side of the ceph unit) do not reach N300.
For the keyboard keys check voltage at TP8 on N300. If
there is no signal replace N1600.
For the ceph keys check voltage at TP9 on N300. If
there is no signal replace N1700.

The voltages are as follows:


up movement 3.7V
down movement 1.3V
stop 2.5V

If the voltages are OK, check the output from N300,


TP13/14. If there is no output replace N300. If there is
output replace the Z-motor.

7 -48 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble shooting

Blown fuses
If a fuse blows repeatedly, it can indicate that there is a
wiring or board problem. This section describes how to
identify the problem if a fuse keeps blowing,

Fuse guide

Support arm
N100, N300, N1700
High power Low power Moving column
N600, N700, N800, N1600

Rotating unit
N900, N1100, N1200, N1400
N200
F1
+9V1,2,3
Moving column
N600, N700, N1600
F2
+19V1,2,3
Rotating unit
N900, N1100, N1200, N1400
F3
-19V1,2,3

N2000 Rotating unit


F4 N900, N1200, N1400
F7 +28V1
F1

F5 Rotating unit
+28v2 N900, N1000, N1400

F6 Moving column
+28V3 N700, N800

Rotating unit Support arm


N1000 N300

Fuse guide

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 49


7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F1 on N2000

Fuse F1 - N2000

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connectors J201 and J202 from N200.
3. Check that wiring between N2000 and N200 is ok. Replace it if needed.
4. If wiring is ok, switch power on

Fuse F1 blows Yes Replace mains switch

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J203 from N200.
3. Connect connectors J201 and J202 to N200.
4. Switch power on.

Fuse F1 blows Yes Replace N200

No

Check wiring between N200 connector J203 and N1000 connector J1002.
If wiring is ok, replace N1000

7 -50 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F1 on N200
If the +9V power supply to the display short-circuits,
fuse F1 on N200 may blow. Switch power off. Discon-
nect connectors J603 and J604 from N600. Switch the
power on. If fuse F1 on N200 blows the problem is NOT
with N1600 NOR with the display module. Refer to
section "Power supply problems"

Fuse F1 - N200
A1 (2)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connectors J204, J205, J206, J207 and J208 from N200.
3. Switch power on

Fuse F1
Yes Replace N200.
blows

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J207 and J208 to N200.
3. Switch power on

Fuse F1 Check wiring between N200 and


Yes
blows N300. If wiring is ok, replace N300.

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J204, J205 and J206 on N200.
3. Disconnect connectors J104, J105, J107, J114 and J115 from N100.
4. Switch power on.

Fuse F1 Check wiring between N200 and


Yes
blows N100. If wiring is ok, replace N100

No

A2 (2)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 51


7. Trouble shooting

A2 (2) F1 - N200

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connectors J107 and J115 from N100.
3. Switch power on.

Fuse F1 Continues
No
blows F1 - N200 B1 (2)

Yes

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connectors J602, J603, J604 and J605 from N600.
3. Disconnect connector J706 from N700.
4. Switch power on.

Fuse F1 Check wiring between N100 and


Yes
blows N600. If wiring is ok, replace N600.

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J602 to N600.
3. Switch power on.

Fuse F1 Check wiring between N600 and


Yes
blows N700. If wiring is ok, replace N700

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J605 on N600 and J706 to N700.
3. Check wiring between N600 and N800.
4. If wiring is ok, switch power on

Fuse F1
Yes Replace N800
blows

No

Check wiring between N600 and N1600. If wiring is ok, replace N1600.

7 -52 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F1 N200
B1 (2)

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J104 and J106 to N100.
3. Disconnect connectors J901 and J902 from N900.
4. Switch power on.

Fuse F1 blows Yes Check wiring between N100 and N900

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J901 and J902 to N900.
3. Disconnect connectors J904 and J905 from N900.
4. Switch power on

Fuse F1 blows Yes Replace N900

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J905 to N900.
3. Switch power on.

Check wiring between N900 and N1200.


Fuse F1 blows Yes
If wiring is ok, replace N1200.

No

B2 (2)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 53


7. Trouble shooting

B2 (2) Fuse F1 N200

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J904 to N900.
3. Disconnect connector J1103 from N1100.
4. Switch power on

Check wiring between N900 and N1100.


Fuse F1 blows Yes
If wiring is ok, replace N1100

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J1103 to N1100.
3. Check wiring between N1100 and N1400. If wiring is ok, replace N1400

7 -54 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F2 on N200
If the +19V power supply to the display short-circuits,
fuse F2 on N200 may blow. Switch power off.
Disconnect connectors J603 and from N600.
Switch the power on. If fuse F1 on N200 blows the
problem is NOT with N1600 NOR with the display mod-
ule. Refer to section "Power supply problems"

Fuse F2 - N200
A1 (2)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connectors J204, J205, J206, J207 and J208 from N200.
3. Switch power on.

Fuse F2
Yes Replace N200.
blows

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J204, J205, J206, J207 and J208 to N200.
3. Disconnect connectors J104, J105, J107 and J115 from N100.
4. Switch power on

Fuse F2 Check wiring between N200 and


Yes
blows N100. If wiring is ok, replace N100.

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J107 and J115 to N100.
3. Switch power on.

Fuse F2 Continues
No
blows F2 - N200 B1 (2)

No

A2 (2)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 55


7. Trouble shooting

A2 (2) F2 - N200

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connectors J602 and J603 on N600 and J706 on N700.
3. Switch power on

Fuse F2 Check wiring between N600 and N100.


Yes
blows If wiring is ok, replace N600.

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J602 to N600 and J706 to N700.
3. Switch power on

Fuse F2 Check wiring between N600 and N700.


Yes
blows If wiring is ok, replace N700.

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J603 to N600.
3. Disconnect connector J1603 from N1600.
4. Switch power on.

Fuse F2 Check wiring between N600 and N1600.


Yes
blows If wiring is ok, replace N1600

No

Replace electroluminecent display module

7 -56 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F2 - N200
B1 (2)

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J104 and J105 to N100.
3. Disconnect connectors J901 and J902 from N900.
4. Switch power on

Fuse F2
Yes Replace wiring between N100 and N900
blows

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J901 and J902 to N900.
3. Disconnect connectors J904 and J905 from N900.
4. Switch power on

Fuse F2
Yes Replace N900
blows

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J905 to N900.
3. Switch power on

Fuse F2 Check wiring between N900 and N1200.


Yes
blows If wiring is ok, replace N1200

No

B2 (2)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 57


7. Trouble shooting

B2 (2) F2 - N200

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J904 to N900.
3. Disconnect connector J1103 from N1100.
4. Switch power on

Fuse F2 Check wiring between N900 and N1200.


Yes
blows If wiring is ok, replace N1200.

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J1103 to N1100.
3. Check wiring between N1100 and N1400.
4. If wiring is ok, replace N1400

7 -58 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F3 on N200

Fuse F3 - N200
1 (2)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connectors J204, J205, J206, J207 and J208 from N200.
3. Switch power on

Fuse F3
Yes Replace N200
blows

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J204, J205, J206, J207 and J208 to N200
3. Disconnect connectors J104, J105, J107 and J115 from N100.
4. Switch power on

Fuse F3 Check wiring between N200 and


Yes
blows N100. If wiring is ok, replace N100

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J107 and J115 to N100.
3. Switch power on

Check wiring in fixed column


Fuse F3
Yes (-19V2 is wired to fixed column but
blows
none of the boards use it).

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J104 and J105 to N100.
3. Disconnect connectors J901 and J902 from N900.
4. Switch power on.

2 (2)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 59


7. Trouble shooting

2 (2) F3 - N200

Fuse F3 Replace wiring between N100 and


Yes
blows N900

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J901 and J902 to N900.
3. Disconnect connectors J904 and J905 from N900.
4. Switch power on

Fuse F3
Yes Replace N900
blows

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J905 to N900.
3. Switch power on.

Check wiring between N900 and


Fuse F3
Yes N1200. If wiring is ok, replace
blows
N1200

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J904 to N900.
3. Disconnect connector J1103 from N1100.
4. Switch power on.

Check wiring between N900 and


Fuse F3
Yes N1100. If wiring is ok, replace
blows
N1100

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J1103 to N1100.
3. Check wiring between N1100 and N1400.
4. If wiring is ok, replace N1400.

7 -60 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F4 on N200
Fuse F4 on N200 protects the Y-lights on N900, the x-
ray tube filament drive on N1400 and the power FET
gate drive on N1000. If the fuse blows when the unit is
switched on, the flow chart below will help you find
where the problem is.

If the fuse keeps blowing when the patient positioning


lights are switched on (focal trough keys are pressed or
the mirror is opened) the problem is with the Y-lights
(focal trough or TMJ) or the wiring to these lights.

Fuse F4 - N200
A1 (2)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J204 from N200.
3. Switch power on.

Fuse F4 blows Yes Replace N200

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J204 to N200.
3. Disconnect connector J105 from N100.
4. Check wiring between N100 and N200.
5. If wiring is OK, switch power on.

Fuse F4 blows Yes Replace N100.

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J105 to N100.
3. Disconnect connectors J904 and J905 from N900.
4. Check wiring between N100 and N900.
5. If wiring is OK, switch power on.

2 (2)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 61


7. Trouble shooting

F4 - N200
2 (2)

Fuse F4 blows Yes Replace N900

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connectors J904 and J905 to N900.
3. Disconnect connectors J1103 from N1100.
4. Check wiring between N900 and N1200 and also between N900 and N1100.
5. If wiring is OK, switch power on

Fuse F4 blows Yes Replace N1000

No

Replace N1400

7 -62 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F5 on N200
Fuse F5 on N200 protects the stepper motor driver and
the X and Z-lights on N700. It also protects any external
device connected to N800. If the fuse blows when the
unit is switched on, the flow chart below will help you
find where the problem is.

Fuse F5 - N200

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J205 from N200.
3. Switch power on.

Fuse F5
Yes Replace N200
blows

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J205 to N200.
3. Disconnect connectors J107 and J115 from N100.
4. Check wiring between N100 and N200.
5. If wiring is ok, switch power on.

Fuse F5
Yes Replace N100
blows

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect connector J107 to N100.
3. Disconnect connector J602 from N600.
4. Check wiring between N100 and N600.
5. If wiring is ok, switch power on.

Fuse F5 Check wiring between N600 and


Yes
blows N800. If wiring is ok, replace N800

No

Check wiring between N100 and N700 and also


between N600 and N700. If wiring is ok, replace N700

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 63


7. Trouble shooting

If the fuse keeps blowing when the patient positioning


lights are switched on (focal trough keys are pressed or
the mirror is opened) the problem is with the X or Y-
lights (focal trough or TMJ) or the wiring to these lights.

If the fuse keeps blowing when the stepper motors are


operated, for example, for focal trough keys are
pressed, the E-key or R button are pressed or an expo-
sure is taken, N700 of the wiring to this board may be
faulty.

7 -64 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F6 on N200
Replace N300 (ZMC). If fuse F6 on N200 (AVS) board
did not blow, check Z-motor wiring. If wiring is ok, re-
place motor. Fuse F 6 on N200 protects N300. Switch
power off. Disconnect connector J303 on N300. Switch
power on and try to drive the unit up and down (press
height adjusting keys one at a time).

If fuse F6 on N200 blows, the problem is with N300. If


the fuse blows when the unit is switched on, the flow
chart below will help you find where the problem is.

Fuse F6 - N200

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J207 from N200.
3. Switch power on.

Fuse F6
Yes Replace N200
blows

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Check wiring between N200 and N300.
3. If wiring is ok replace N300.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 65


7. Trouble shooting

Fuse F1 on N1000
If N1000 is damaged the F1, on N1000 or F1 on N2000
may blow.
Check the FETs on N1000. If shorted, replace N1000. If
the FETs are OK but the fuse keeps blowing, replace
the tubehead.

7 -66 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

Generator problems
Generator Test Program
A special x-ray generator test program is included in the
unit software.
If there is a problem with the generator during unit start
up or operation an error message will appear on the
display, for example:
ERR65 GENERATOR FAILURE: kV
The generator test program automatically carries out a
number of tests that can identify what the problem is

Running the generator test program

Open service code 9779, X-ray generator test menu,


and then select option #2 - Exposure sequence test.
=== X-ray Generator Test Selections:==========

#0. RETURN to MAIN level

#1. Exposure with kV,mA,time

#2. Exposure sequence test

#3. Exposure sequence diagram

#?. 2

Press the E key. A second menu will appear on the


display. Select option #1 - Analyze generator
=== X-ray generator sequence test ===
2 #0. Back to upper menu

#1. Analyze generator

#2. Tube voltage without current

#3. Exposure with filament feedback

#4. X-ray tube filament heating

#5. Filament feedback [off->ON]

#?. 1

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 67


7. Trouble Shooting

Press the E key. A warning message will appear on the


display.
Protect yourself from radiation.
3 Press and hold exposure button until exposure

lights are turned off.

WARNING
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM RADIATION

Press and hold down the exposure button. The exposure


warning lights will come on and you will hear an audible
signal. These indicate that X-rays are being generated.

Hold the exposure button down for the duration of the


test. During the test information will appear on the dis-
play as the X-ray generator is checked.

When the warning lights go out and the signal tone stops
the test is complete.

The results of the X-ray generator test will appear on


the display. If all the tests were successful the X-ray
generator is working properly, example below.

Tube Voltage:__57__60__63__66__70__73__77__81__85
3 kV test passed...

mA control check: passed...

Tube current:__1.0__1.3__1.6__2.0__2.5__3.2__4.0

__5.0__6.4__8.0__10.0__13.0__15.0

mA check passed...

Tube Voltage:__57__60__63__66__70__73__77__81__85

kV check passed.

Generator OK.

WAIT : 270 sec

7 -68 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

If the unit does not pass the generator test a generator


error message will appear on the display. The error
messages are described below,

Generator error codes

Start of test Possible error messges

TEST 1 GE1 "KVFBM error xxV detected, 0V expected."


Generator off (check feedbacks). GE2 "MAFBM error xxV detected, 1.6V expected."

TEST 2 GE3 "Net voltage is not OK."


Raise tube voltage without filament GE4 "Tube voltage is not OK."
heating. GE5 "Tube voltage error.xxkV measured, xxkV expected"

GE6 "Net voltage is not OK."


TEST 3 GE7 "No tube current."
Tube voltage with filament heating GE8 "Too much tube current."
(filament voltage feedback). GE9 "KVFAIL error. Tube voltage is not OK."
GE10 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected.

TEST 4 GE11 "Net voltage is not OK."


Tube voltage with filament heating GE12 "Tube current is not OK.
(tube current feedback). GE13 "Tube voltage is not OK"

TEST 5 GE14 "Net voltage is not OK."


Raise tube current to its maximum GE15 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected"
value when tube voltage is on. GE16 "Tube current error.xxmA measured, xxmA expected"

TEST 5 GE17 "Net voltage is not OK.


Raise tube current to its maximum GE18 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected"
vale when tube voltage is on. GE19 "Tube current error.xxmA measured, xxmA expected"

End of test

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 69


7. Trouble Shooting

GE1 "KVFBM error. xxV detected, 0V expected."


The tube voltage feedback signal is not ok.

GE1 1(2)
"KVFBM error. xxV detected, 0V expected."

Check power LEDS on boards on N900, N1000, N1100


and N1400 to see if the boards are receiving power.

Receiving
No Refer to "Power supply problems"
power

Yes

Measure KVFBM (TP19 on N1100) with DMM. Voltage must be under +0.15VDC.

Voltage Check cables between N1100 and N900.


Yes
correct If cables are OK replace N900.

No

Measure KVFB (TP8 on N1400) with DMM. Voltage must be under +0.15VDC.

Voltage Check cables between N1400 and N100.


Yes
correct If cables are OK replace N1100.

No

Measure KVFB (TP1 on N1400) with DMM. Voltage must be under +0.15VDC.

GE1
2 (2)

7 -70 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

2 (2) GE1

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect J1402 from N1400.
Voltage
No 3. Measure KVFB+ resistance across tubehead
correct
(between pins 1 and 3) with a DMM. Resistance
must be 46-49 kohm.

Resistance
No Replace tubehead.
correct
Yes

Yes

Replace N1400.

Measure KVFB- (TP3 on N1400) with DMM. Voltage must be between -0.15 and 0VDC.

Voltage Switch power off.


No
correct Disconnect J1402 from N1400.

Yes
Measure KVFB- resistance across tubehead (between pins 1
and 4) with a DMM. Resistance must be 46-49 kohm.
Replace N1400

Resistance
No Replace tubehead.
correct

Yes

Replace N1400.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 71


7. Trouble Shooting

GE2 "MAFBM error. xxV detected, 1.6V expected."


The tube current feedback signal is not ok.

GE2 "MAFBM error. xxV detected, 1.6V expected."

Check that boards N900, N1000, N1100 and N1400 are receiving power.

Receiving
No Refer to "Power supply problems"
power

Yes

Measure MAFBM (TP20 on N1100) with DMM.


Voltage must be between +1.5 - 1.7VDC.

Voltage Measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with DMM.


No
correct Voltage must be between +1.5 - 1.7VDC.

Voltage Check wiring between N1400 and


Yes
correct N1100.If wiring is ok, replace N1100.

No

1. Switch power off.


Yes 2. Disconnect connector J1402.
3. Measure MAFB resistance in tube head (between pins 1 and 5)
with DMM. Resistance must be between 170 - 190ohm.

Resistance
Replace N1400 Yes No Replace tube head.
correct

Measure MAFBM (TP24 on N900) with DMM. Voltage must be between +1.5 - 1.7VDC.

Check wiring between N1100 - N900.


OK No
If wiring is OK, replace N900.

Yes

Replace N900

7 -72 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

GE3 "Net voltage is not ok."


The network voltage was too low during the test. Refer
to the Technical specifications.

GE4 "Tube voltage is not ok."

GE5 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected."

GE 4/5 A1 (3)
GE4 "Tube voltage not ok."
GE5 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, 0V expected."

1. Switch power off.


2. Disable kV monitoring (SW1 on N1100 opened).
3. Disconnect connector J1003.
4. Switch power on.

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 2 ("Tube voltage without current").

D33
on N1000 is No Continues on flow diagram GE4/5 B1 (1)
on

Yes

Press and hold exposure button down and check


that LEDs D19 and D20 on N1000 are on.

LEDS
No Continues on flow diagram GE4/5 C1 (2)
are on

Yes

A2 (3)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 73


7. Trouble Shooting

A2 (3) GE 4/5

Measure KVREF (TP16 on N1100) with DMM.


Voltage must be between +3.0 - 3.15VDC

Voltage
No Continues on flow diagram GE4/5 D1 (1)
OK

Yes

1. Switch power off.


2. Connect J1003.
3. Measure KVFB+ (TP1 on N1400) with DMM while exposure button is
pressed.Voltage must be between +2.4 - 3.7VDC.

A3 (3)

7 -74 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

A3 (3) GE4/5

Voltage Check wiring between N1000 and tuhehead and also between
No
OK N1400 and tubehead.If wirings are ok, replace tubehead.

Yes

Measure KVFB- (TP3 on N1400) with DMM while exposure button is pressed.
Voltage must be between -2.4VDC and -3.7VDC.

Voltage Check wiring between N1000 and tuhehead and also between
No
OK N1400 and tubehead.If wirings are ok, replace tubehead.

Yes

Measure KVFB (TP8 on N1400) with DMM while exposure button is pressed.
Voltage must be between +3.0 - 3.15VDC.

Voltage
No Replace N1400.
OK

Yes

Measure KVFBM (TP19 on N1100) with DMM while exposure button is


pressed. Voltage must be between +3.0 - 3.15VDC.

Voltage Check wiring between N1400 and N1100.


No
OK If wiring is ok, replace N1100.

Yes

Check wiring between N1100 - N900.


If wiring is ok, replace N900.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 75


7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram GE4/5


B1 (1)

Check that fuse F1 on N1000 has not blown.

Replace fuse. If fuse blows frequently,


Fuse blown Yes
refer to section "Blown fuses"

No

Check that LED D21 on N1000 is on.

LED on Yes Replace N1100 (N1000 if required)

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J904.
3. Switch power on.

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 2 ("Tube voltage without current").

Measure AVC* (TP7 on N900) with DMM.


Voltage must be under +0.5VDC.

Voltage
No Replace N900
OK

Yes

Check that LED D21 on N1000 is on.

7 -76 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram GE4/5


C1 (2)

Check that LED D20 on N1100 is on while exposure button is pressed

LED is on Yes Replace N1000

No

Check that exposure button is not locked. If it was, rerun test the program

Measure EXPC* (TP13 on N900) with DMM while exposure button is


pressed. Voltage must be under +0.5VDC.

Measure EXPC2* (TP9 on N900) with a DMM while the exposure


Voltage OK Yes
button is pressed. The voltage must be under +0.5VDC.

No

Measure EXP* (TP36 on N600) with a Voltage OK Yes Replace N900


DMM while the exposure button is pressed.
The voltage must be under +0.5VDC
No

Check wiring between N900 - N1100

Measure EXPC* (TP34 on N600) with a DMM while the exposure


Voltage OK Yes
button is pressed. The voltage must be under +0.5VDC.

No
Voltage OK Yes Replace N600
Check that LED D20 on N800 is on while
exposure button is pressed.
No

Check wiring between N600 - N100 and between N100 - N900


C2 (2)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 77


7. Trouble Shooting

C2 (2) GE4/5

LED is on Yes Check wiring between N800 - N600


no

No yes

Check N800 operating powers. LEDS D6,


D14, and D18 must be on.

LEDs are on No Refer to section " Power supply problems

Yes

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J803.
3. Use a DMM to measure the resistance across pins 1 and 2.

The resistance must be zero when the exposure button is pressed.

Resistance
No Replace exposure button.
is zero

Yes

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J802.
3. Use a DMM to measure the resistance across pins 1 and 2.

The resistance must be zero when the exposure button is pressed.

Resistance
No Replace exposure lock.
is zero

Yes

Replace N800

7 -78 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram GE4/5


D1 (1)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J904 from N900.
3. Switch power on.

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 2 ("Tube voltage without current").

Measure KVREF (TP27 on N900) with DMM.


KVREF must be between +3.0 - 3.15VDC.

Voltage OK No Replace N900

No

Check wiring between N900 - N1100.


If the wiring is OK. replace N1100

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 79


7. Trouble Shooting

GE6 "Net voltage is not ok."


The line voltage was too low during the test. Refer to
technical specifications

7 -80 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

GE7 "No tube current."


The tube voltage and filament heating are on but there is
no tube current.

GE 7 "No tube current"


A1 (3)

Check that correct x-ray tube type is configured. Sevice code 9420

Check operating powers of boards N900, N1000, N1100 and N1400.

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 3 ("Exposure with filament feedback").

Check that LED D24 on N1400 is on.

LED
No Continues on flow diagram GE7 B1 (1)
is on

Yes

Press exposure button and check that LED D1 on N1100 is on.

LED
No Continues on flow diagram GE7 C1 (1)
is on

Yes

Check if LED D19 on N1100 is on.

LED
Yes Continues on flow diagram GE7 D1 (1)
is on

No

GE7
A2 (3)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 81


7. Trouble Shooting

GE7
A2 (3)

No

Measure MAREF (TP17 on N1100) with DMM. Voltage must be between


displayed limits.

MAREF OK No Continues on flow diagram GE7 E1 (1)

Yes

Press exposure button and measure FILFB (TP11 on N1400) with a DMM.
Voltage must be between displayed MAREF limits.

MAREF OK No Continues on flow diagram GE7 F1 (1)

Yes

Press exposure button and measure FILFB (TP10 on N1100) with a DMM.
Voltage must be between displayed MAREF limits.

Check wiring between N1400 - N1100.


MAREF OK No
Replace N1100 if needed

Yes

Press exposure button and measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with DMM.
Voltage must be between +1.6 - 3.2VDC.

MAREF OK No Continues on flow diagram GE7 G1 (1)

Yes

GE7
A3 (3)

7 -82 Cranex Tome Service Manual


7. Trouble Shooting

GE7
A3 (3)

No

Press exposure button and measure MAFBM (TP20 on N1100) with DMM.
Voltage must be between +1.6 - 3.2VDC.

Check wiring between N1400 - N1100.


MAFBM OK No
Replace N1100 if required.

Yes

Check wiring between N1100 - N900.


Replace N900 if required.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 83


7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram GE7


B1 (1)

Switch power off.

Check if fuse F1 on N1400 is ok.

Fuse Replace fuse.


No
is ok If it blows fequently, refer to section "Blown fuses".

Yes

Check wiring between N1100 - N1400.


If wiring is ok, replace N1400.

7 -84 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram GE7


C1 (1)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J904.
3. Switch power on.

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 3 ("Exposure with filament feedback").

Press exposure button and measure HEAT* (TP8 on N900)


with DMM. Voltage must be between 0VDC - +1.0VDC.

Voltage OK No Replace N900.

Yes

Check wiring between N900 - N1100.


If wiring is ok, replace N1100.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 85


7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram GE7


D1 (1)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J904.
3. Switch power on.

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 3 ("Exposure with filament feedback").

Measure F/MA* (TP6 on N900) with DMM.


Voltage must be between +4.0VDC - 5.5VDC.

Voltage OK No Replace N900.

Yes

Check wiring between N900 - N1100.


If wiring is ok, replace N1100.

7 -86 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram GE7


E1 (1)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J904.
3. Switch power on.

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 3 ("Exposure with filament feedback").

Measure MAREF (TP26 on N900) with DMM.


Voltage must be between displayed MAREF limits.

Voltage OK No Replace N900.

Yes

Check wiring between N900 - N1100.


If wiring is ok, replace N1100.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 87


7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram GE7


F1 (1)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J1402

Measure resistance between tube head pins 6 and 7 and


between pins 6 and 8. Resistances must be under 1 ohm

Resistance OK No Replace tubehead and N1400

Yes

Check wiring between N1400 - tubehead.


If wiring is ok, replace N1400.

7 -88 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram GE7


G1 (1)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J1402

Measure resistance between tube head pins 1 and 5 with


DMM. Resistance must be between 170 - 190 ohm

Resistance OK No Replace tubehead

Yes

Measure resistance between tube head pins 6 and 7 and


between pins 6 and 8. Resistances must be under 1ohm

Resistance OK No Replace tubehead and N1400

Yes

Check wiring between N1400 - tube head.


If wiring is ok, replace tube head

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 89


7. Trouble Shooting

GE8 "Too much tube current."


Tube current too high.

GE 8 "Too much tube current"


A1 (3)

Check that correct x-ray tube type is configured. Sevice code 9420

Check operating powers of boards N900, N1000, N1100 and N1400.

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 4 ("X-ray tube filament heating").

Measure MAREF (TP17 on N1100) with DMM.


Voltage must be between displayed limits

Voltage OK No Continues on flow diagram GE8 B1 (1)

Yes

Measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with DMM.


Voltage must be between +1.5 - 1.7VDC

GE8
A2 (3)

7 -90 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

GE8
A2 (3)

Voltage OK No Continues on flow diagram GE8 C1 (1)

Yes

Measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with DMM.


Voltage must be between +1.5 - 1.7VDC

LED
No Continues on flow diagram GE8 D1 (1)
is on

Yes

GE8
A3 (3)

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 91


7. Trouble Shooting

GE8
A3 (3)

Yes

LED
Check wiring between N900 - N1100.
D19 on 1100 Yes
If wiring is ok, replace N900
is on

No

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 3 ("Exposure with filament feedback").

Press exposure button and measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with


DMM. Voltage must be between +1.5 - 3.3VDC.

Voltage OK No Continues on flow diagram GE8 E1 (1)

Yes

Measure MAFBM (TP20 on N1100) with DMM.


Voltage must be between +1.5 - 1.7VDC.

Check wiring between N1400 - N1100.


Voltage OK No
If wiring is ok, replace N1100.

Yes

Check wiring between N1100 - N900.


If wiring is ok, replace N900.

7 -92 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram
B1 (1)

MAFB is Check wiring between N1400 - N1100.


No
< +1.5VDC If wiring is ok, replace N1400.

Yes

Replace N1100.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 93


7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram
C1 (1)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J1402

Measure MAFB+ resistance between


tube head pins 1 and 5. Resistances
must be between 170 - 190W.

OK No Replace tube head

Yes

Check wiring between N1400 - tube


head. If wiring is ok, replace N1400

7 -94 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram
D1 (1)

Measure FILFB (TP11 on N1400) with


DMM. Voltage must be between
displayed MAREF limits.

OK No Replace N1400

Yes

Check wiring between N1400 - N1100.


If wiring is ok, replace N1100.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 95


7. Trouble Shooting

Flow diagram
E 1 (1)

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J904.
3. Switch power on

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 4 ("X-ray tube filament heating").

Measure MAREF (TP26 on N900) with


DMM. Voltage must be between displayed
limits

OK No Replace N900

Yes

Check wiring between N900 - N1100.


If wiring is ok, replace N1100

7 -96 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

GE9 "KVFAIL error. Tube voltage is not ok."


KVFAIL* signal active. The line voltage is not within its
limits.
Replace tube head.

GE10 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected."


The tube voltage is not within its limits.
Replace tube head.

GE11 "Net voltage is not ok."


Net voltage is detected to be too low during test. See
power requirements in Cranex TOME Service manual
section "Technical specifications".

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 97


7. Trouble Shooting

GE12 "Tube current is not ok."


The tube current is not within its limits.

GE12

Check operating powers of boards N900,


N1000, N1100 and N1400

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 5 ("Filament feedback selection").

Check that LED D19 on N1100 is on

OK Yes Replace N1100

No

1. Switch power off.


2. Disconnect connector J904 from N1100
3. Switch power on.

1. Select service code 9779.


2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 5 ("Filament feedback selection").

Measure F/MA*(TP6 on N900) with DMM.


Voltage must be between +4.0 - 5.5VDC.

OK No Replace N900

Yes

Check wiring between N900 - N1100.


If wiring is ok, replace N1100

7 -98 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
7. Trouble Shooting

GE13 "Tube voltage is not ok."


The tube voltage is not within its limits.
Replace tube head.

GE14 "Net voltage is not ok."


Net voltage is detected to be too low during test. See
power requirements in Cranex TOME Service manual
section "Technical specifications". Refer to GE 4/5.

GE15 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected."


Check that correct x-ray tube type is configured.
See service code 9420. Refer to GE 4/5.

GE16 "Tube current error. xxmA measured, xxmA expected."


Check that correct x-ray tube type is configured.
See service code 9420. Refer to GE 12.

GE17 "Net voltage is not ok."


Net voltage is detected to be too low during test. See
power requirements in Cranex TOME Service manual
section "Technical specifications".

GE18 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected."


Check that correct x-ray tube type is configured.
See service code 9420. Refer to GE 4/5.

GE19 "Tube current error. xxmA measured, xxmA expected."


Check that correct x-ray tube type is configured.
See service code 9420. Refer to GE 2.

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 99


7. Trouble Shooting

7 -100 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
8. Mechanical Parts Contents

8. Mechanical Parts
Contents
Replacing the tube head ................................................................................... 8-1
Removing the tube head .................................................................................. 8-1
Installing a new tube head ............................................................................... 8-4

Doc. code 8200629 8-i


Contents 8. Mechanical Parts

8 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual


8. Mechanical Parts

Replacing the tube head


Removing the tube head
1. Remove the tube head cover. See section 3 - Cov-
ers and cover removal.

2. Slide the collimator assembly out of the collimator


holder. Disconnect cables from connectors J1404,
J1402, J1401 on the N1400 board. If the unit is a
pan/ceph also disconnect J1403.

J1402 J1401

J1404
J1403
N1400 (Optional - Pan/ceph units only)

Collimator assembly

Collimator holder

Doc. code 8200629 8-1


8. Mechanical Parts

3. Remove the N1400 board. Disconnect the red con-


nector that connects the power cable that runs from
the C-arm to the tube head. Also disconnect the tube
head ground lead. It is screwed to the C-arm frame.

Power cable Red connector

C-arm frame

Tube head ground lead

N1400

4. From the under side of the tube head assembly,


remove the two screws that hold the tube head
support clips to the rear cover.

Tube head support clips

Tube head

Rear cover

8 -2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


8. Mechanical Parts

5. Remove the four screws that hold the tube head in


position and then remove the tube head.

Tube head

6. Remove the collimator holder, the ground lead and


the support clips from the tube head.

Ground lead

Tube head
Collimator holder

Support clips

Doc. code 8200629 8-3


8. Mechanical Parts

Installing a new tube head


1. Attach the collimator holder, the ground lead and the
support clips to the new tube head.

2. Instal the new tube head by following, in the reverse


order, the instructions for removing the tube head.

3. If the new tube head is a different type than the


existing one, the new tube type must be pro-
grammed into the unit memory. Refer to service
code 9420.

4. Check and if necessary adjust the beam alignment of


the unit. Refer to the "Installation and set-up
manual".

8 -4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


8. Mechanical Parts

Doc. code 8200629 8-5


9. Annual Service Contents

9. Annual Service
Contents
Annual tests and inspections ........................................................................... 9-1
mA test ............................................................................................................ 9-1
kV test ............................................................................................................. 9-1
Exposure time test ........................................................................................... 9-2
Motor Movement ............................................................................................. 9-2
Position Detectors ........................................................................................... 9-3
Cassette Sensors ............................................................................................ 9-3
Panoramic Alignment ....................................................................................... 9-4
Cephalometric Alignment ................................................................................. 9-4
Soft Filter Alignment ........................................................................................ 9-4
Patient Positioning Lights ................................................................................. 9-4
Covers and Labels ........................................................................................... 9-4

Doc. code 8200629 9-i


Contents 9. Annual Service

9 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual


9. Annual Service

Annual tests and inspections


The following inspections and tests must be carried out
annually by an authorized service person to verify that
the Cranex Tome X-ray unit meets the specifications and
performance criteria essential for correct operation.
When taking measurements that require a multimeter,
always use a calibrated digital multimeter (DMM).

mA test
Protect yourself from radiation when carrying out this
test.
Connect the +probe of a DMM to test pin TP24 and the
-probe to TP18, 29, 42 or 43.

Select service code 9779 option #1.

Select different mA values, listed below, take exposures


using these values and check the feedback values from
the DMM. The feedback values must be within the toler-
ances shown.

Selected mA mAfb1 (V) Tolerance (V)


1 1.79 ±0.02
3.2 2.15 ±0.06
10 3.24 ±0.16

If the values are not with the recommended tolerances,


there may be a problem with the N1000 and/or N1100.

kV test
Protect yourself from radiation when carrying out this
test.
Connect the +probe of a DMM to test pin TP25 and the
-probe to TP18, 29, 42 or 43.

Select service code 9779 option #1.

Select different kV values, listed below, take exposures


using these values and check the feedback values from
the DMM. The feedback values must be within the toler-
ances shown.

Doc. code 8200629 9-1


9. Annual Service

Selected kV kVfb1 (V) Tolerance (V)


57 3.08 ±0.05
70 3.76 ±0.05
85 4.55 ±0.05

If the values are not with the recommended tolerances,


there may be a problem with the N1000 and/or N1100.

Exposure time test


Protect yourself from radiation when carrying out this
test.
Set the unit up to take any cephalometric program.

Connect the +probe of a storage oscilloscope to test pin


TP25 and the -probe to TP18, 29, 42 or 43.

Select different exposure times, listed below, take expo-


sures using these times and, using the oscilloscope,
check that the times are within the tolerances shown.

Time selected Tolerance


0.32 sec. ±0.03 sec.
1 sec. ±0.08 sec.
3.3 sec. ±0.26 sec.

Motor Movements
Switch the unit off and then manually check that all the
stepper motors move freely and without any looseness:
– rotate the C-arm to check the R-motor
– push the rotating unit in and out to check the Y-motor
– push the rotating unit from side to side to check the
x-motor
– push the tubehead up and down to check the V-
motor
– push the cassette carriage in and out to check the
C-motor
Also take various exposures, with x-rays turned off, to
check that the motors operate smoothly and without any
noise. Press the up/down keys to check the Z-motor.

9-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual


9. Annual Service

Position Detectors
Cassette Shield Microswitches
Select panoramic program 001. Make sure that the
program is ready when the cassette shields are closed.
Select tomography program 381. Make sure that the
program is ready when the cassette shields are open.

Chin rest Microswitches


Select panoramic program 001. Make sure that the
program is ready when the chin rest is in the upper
position. Select a tomography program 331, the upper
jaw. Make sure that the program is ready when the chin
rest is in the lower position.

Cassette Head Microswitches


Select panoramic program 001. Make sure that the
program is ready when the cassette head is in the nor-
mal pan position.
Select cephalometric program 023. Make sure that the
program is ready when the cassette head is in the ceph
position.

Z-Move Sensors
Press the up key and drive the unit slowly up. Make sure
that the unit stops moving at its uppermost position.
Press the down key and drive the unit slowly down.
Make sure that the unit stops moving at its lowermost
position.

Cassette Sensors
Panoramic
Select the pan program 001. Insert a pan cassette into
the cassette carriage. Make sure that exposure is
ready when the cassette is cassette. Also that pano-
ramic cassette sensitivity detection functions correctly.
The sensitivity number (SN) will appear briefly on the
display when a cassette is inserted.

Cephalometric
Select the a ceph program and then insert the correct
cassette in the correct orientation for that program.
Make sure that the exposure is ready when the cassette
is inserted. Repeat this test with all cassette sizes used.

Doc. code 8200629 9-3


9. Annual Service

Panoramic Alignment
Take a panoramic exposure (001) with the lowest kV.
Develop the film. Make sure that the exposed area on
the film does not extend beyond any of the edges of
film.
If it does the unit will have to be realigned.
Refer to the installation manual for information on how to
do this.

Cephalometric Alignment
Take a cephalometric exposure with the lowest kV and
shortest exposure time. Develop the film. Make sure that
the exposed area on the film does not extend beyond
any of the edges of film.
If it does the unit will have to be realigned.
Refer to the installation manual for information on how to
do this.
Repeat this test with all the different ceph cassettes.

Soft Filter Alignment


Set the unit up to take any AH or AV ceph program. Turn
soft tissue filter knob to the middle position, three lights
on. Tape a coin on the cassette roughly where the filter
line lies. Take an exposure and process the film. Check
that the filter edge coincides with the image of the coin
on the film. The accuracy is ±5mm. If the filter is not
correctly positioned it will have to be adjusted.
Refer to the installation manual for information on how to
do this.
Also make sure that the soft tissue filter lights do not
operate when the unit is in the pan position.

Patient Positioning Lights


Use the ball phantom to check the operation and align-
ment of the patient positioning lights. Refer to installation
manual for information on how to do this.

Covers and Labels


Check that all covers are correctly installed and in good
condition. Also check that all the labels are attached to
the unit and that they are all legible.

9-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual


Appendix A. Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications
Type
SRC-1

Classification
Complies with IEC 601-1, IEC 601-2-7, IEC 601-2-28, IEC 601-2-32, IEC 878,
UL 2601-1 (for products with UL Classification Mark) and EN 55011 standards.
Complies with DHHS Radiation Performance Standard, 21CFR Subchapter J.
Safety according to IEC 601-1
Protection against electric shock - Class I
Degree of protection - Type B applied parts with no conductive connection to
patient
Protection against ingress of liquids - IPX 0
Disinfection methods:
- mild soapy water
- non-alcohol based disinfectant for the chin rest
- disposable plastic covers for bite piece/chin support
For use in environments where no flammable anaesthetics and/or flammable clean-
ing agents are present.
Mode of operation - continuous operation/intermittent loading

Description
A dental panoramic/cephalometric unit with a high frequency switching mode x-ray
generator. In addition to panoramic exposures, the unit can also take tomograms
and scanograms. An optional cephalometric device is available that uses the pano-
ramic x-ray source. The unit must be permanently installed and shall comply with
National Electric Codes.

Generator
TUBE
- OPX/105, DE 100/15 or D-051, XL 90
FOCAL SPOT
- 0,5 IEC 336 for tubes OPX/105, DE 100/15 and D-051
- 0,4 IEC 336 for tube XL90
TARGET ANGLE
- 5º
TARGET MATERIAL
- Tungsten
OPERATING TUBE POTENTIAL
- Panoramic 57 - 81 kV (±1 kV)
- Cephalometric 60 - 85 kV (±1 kV)
- Maximum (nominal) 85 kV, 10 mA
OPERATING TUBE CURRENT
- 1 mA to 10 mA (average values, peak value 15 mA maximum)
- maximum 10 mA at 85 kV

Doc. code 8200629 A-1


Appendix A. Technical Specifications

MAXIMUM OUTPUT POWER


- 850 W nominal at 85 kV, 10 mA
REFERENCE CURRENT TIME PRODUCT
- 3.2 mAs at 60 kV, 10 mA, 0.32 s
FILTRATION
- Inherent filtration minimum 2.5 mm Al at 70 kV
- Total filtration (Pan, scano, ceph and TMJ scano) minimum 2.7 mm Al at 70
kV
- Additional tomo aperture 3 filtration: minimum 3.0 mm Al at 47 kV
(Material 0.4 mm Cd2O2S:Tb)
- Additional tomo aperture 4 filtration: minimum 8.4 mm Al at 47 kV
(Material 1.6 mm Cd2O2S:Tb)
- Patient support attenuation equivalent: less than 0.2 mm Al
BEAM QUALITY
- HVL (Pan, scano, ceph and TMJ scano) minimum 3.1 mm Al at 70 kV
- HVL, tomo aperture 3, minimum 2.1 mm Al at 47 kV
- HVL, tomo aperture 4, minimum 3.2 mm Al at 47 kV
PRIMARY PROTECTIVE SHIELDING
- Minimum 0.5 mm Pb or equivalent
OUTER SHELL TEMPERATURE
- +50ºC (122ºF) maximum
DUTY CYCLE
- Panoramic: 1:15, 81 kV/10mA
- Cephalometric: 1:15, 85 kV/10mA

Power requirements
INPUT VOLTAGE
- 115/220-240 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz single phase, permanently installed
LINE CURRENT
- Long-time: 115/220-240 VAC, 1A (cont.)
- Momentary: 115/220-240 VAC, 16A /8A, 60/50hz
MAXIMUM LINE RESISTANCE
- 1 ohm
MAXIMUM LINE FUSING
- 10 A slow (main fuse 8A slow in device) @ 220-240 VAC
- 25 A slow (main fuse 16A slow in device) @ 115 VAC
LINE SAFETY SWITCH (when required)
- Approved type, min. 10 A 250 VAC
EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER (when required)
- Approved type, min. 16 A 250 VAC, breaker activation leakage current in
accordance with local regulations.

A -2 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
Appendix A. Technical Specifications

Mechanical parameters
PANORAMIC
- SID 560 mm (±20 mm)
- Magnification factor from 1.25 to 1.5
CEPHALOMETRIC
- SID 1632 - 1707mm
- SOD (Source object distance) 1497
- Magnification factor from 1.09 to 1.14
WEIGHT
- Pan 150 kg
- Pan/Ceph 160 kg
DIMENSIONS
- Pan (HxWxD) 2405 x 1000 x 1480 mm (90" x 40" x 58")
- Pan/Ceph (HxWxD) 2405 x 1868 x 1480 mm (90" x 74" x 58")
VERTICAL HEIGHT OF CHIN REST
- 984-1774 mm (39"-70")

Cassettes
PANORAMIC
- 15 x 30 cm (6" x 12")
CEPHALOMETRIC
- 18 x 24 cm, 24 x 30 cm, and 8" x 10"

Recommended film/screen combinations


CASS1
- Kodak T-MAT G/RA 15 - Kodak Lanex MEDIUM
CASS2
- Kodak T-MAT G/RA 15 - Kodak Lanex FINE
CASS3
- Kodak T-MAT G/RA 15 - Kodak Lanex FINE

Timer
PANORAMIC EXPOSURE TIMES:
- Panoramic 11 - 24 sec
- Scanograms 6 - 24 sec
- Tomograms 14 - 56 sec
- Cephalometric 0.32 - 3.2 sec

Leakage technique factors


PANORAMIC
- 81 kV, 2400 mAs/h (81 kV, 10 mA, duty cycle 1:15, for example normal
exposure per 4 minutes cool-down period)

CEPHALOMETRIC
- 85 kV, 2250 mAs/h (85 kV, 10 mA, duty cycle 1:16, for example 3.2 s expo
sure per 1 minute cool-down period)

Doc. code 8200629 A-3


Appendix A. Technical Specifications

Measurement bases
- The kV is measured by monitoring differentially the current flowing through
450 Mohm, 1% feedback resistors connected between the tube anode/
cathode and ground.
- The mA is measured by monitoring current in the HT return line, which equals
the tube current.

Tube housing assembly cooling characteristics

Collimator
Six collimators are available:
- Standard metric, left and right-hand versions
It includes: adult panoramic slit, child panoramic slit, two tomography
apertures, 18 x 24 cm AV aperture, 18 x 24 cm AH aperture, 18 x 24 cm
SV aperture, and a 24 x 30 cm AV aperture.
- Large metric, left and right-hand versions
It includes: adult panoramic slit, child panoramic slit, two tomography
apertures, 24 x 30 cm SV aperture, 24 x 30 cm AV aperture, and a
24 x 30 cm AH aperture.
- Inch size, left and right-hand versions
It includes: adult panoramic slit, child panoramic slit, two tomography
apertures, 8 x 10 in AV aperture, 8 x 10 in SV aperture, and a 8 x 10 in
AH aperture.

A -4 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
Appendix A. Technical Specifications

Environmental data
Operating
- ambienttemperature from +10º to +40ºC
- relative humidity 20 to 90% no condensation
Storage/transportation
- ambient temperature from -25º to +50ºC
- relative humidity 5 to 90% no condensation
- atmospheric pressure 500 - 1080 mbar

Interface
RS-232C type interface. See section "Warnings and precautions".

Doc. code 8200629 A-5


Appendix A. Technical Specifications

Tube rating chart Anode thermal characteristics

OPX/105

Tube rating chart Anode thermal characteristics

XL-90

A -6 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
Appendix A. Technical Specifications

Tube rating chart Anode thermal characteristics

DE 100/15 ö and DOA 100

Tube rating chart Anode thermal characteristics

D-051

Doc. code 8200629 A-7


Appendix A. Technical Specifications

Unit dimensions

A -8 Cranex Tome Service


Manual
Appendix A. Technical Specifications

Doc. code 8200629 A-9


Appendix A. Technical Specifications

A -10 Cranex Tome Service


Manual

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen